G120 CU230P2 Op Instr 1020 en-US
G120 CU230P2 Op Instr 1020 en-US
G120 CU230P2 Op Instr 1020 en-US
SINAMICS
SINAMICS G120 und G120P
Low voltage converters
Built-in and wall mounting units with
CU230P-2 Control Units
Fundamental safety
instructions 1
SINAMICS Introduction 2
Description 3
SINAMICS G120, SINAMICS G120P
Converter with CU230P-2 Control
Units Installing 4
Commissioning 5
Operating Instructions
Uploading the converter
settings 6
Protecting the converter
settings 7
Advanced commissioning 8
Alarms, faults and system
messages 9
Corrective maintenance 10
Technical data 11
Appendix A
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may
be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
New hardware
• Control Unit Adapter Kit
Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20 (Page 55)
Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM240-2 Power Module, IP20
(Page 74)
Directives and standards (Page 29)
• Sine-wave filter for the PM240-2 Power Module
Sine-wave filter (Page 50)
New functions
Overview of all new and modified functions in firmware V4.7 SP13:
Firmware version 4.7 SP13 (Page 557)
Revised descriptions
• Motor overload protection according to IEC/UL 61800-5-1
How do I achieve a motor overload protection in accordance with IEC/UL 61800-5-1?
(Page 392)
• Converter replacement
Uploading the converter settings (Page 211)
Replace Control Unit (Page 455)
Downloading the converter settings (Page 457)
Replacing a Power Module (Page 468)
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 557
A.1 New and extended functions............................................................................................ 557
A.1.1 Firmware version 4.7 SP13 ............................................................................................... 557
A.1.2 Firmware version 4.7 SP10 ............................................................................................... 558
A.1.3 Firmware version 4.7 SP9 ................................................................................................. 560
A.1.4 Firmware version 4.7 SP6 ................................................................................................. 562
A.1.5 Firmware version 4.7 SP3 ................................................................................................. 563
A.1.6 Firmware version 4.7 ....................................................................................................... 565
A.1.7 Firmware version 4.6 SP6 ................................................................................................. 566
A.1.8 Firmware version 4.6 ....................................................................................................... 567
A.1.9 Firmware version 4.5 ....................................................................................................... 568
A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter ........................................................................... 569
A.2.1 Fundamentals.................................................................................................................. 569
A.2.2 Application example ........................................................................................................ 571
A.3 Manuals and technical support......................................................................................... 573
A.3.1 Overview of the manuals ................................................................................................. 573
A.3.2 Configuring support ......................................................................................................... 576
A.3.3 Product Support............................................................................................................... 577
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 579
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or tripping
too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
• In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the converter is connected to the line supply at least
meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
• You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short circuit
does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to respond. The
required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply systems.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or a
fire.
• Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the converter does
not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.
WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched,
can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may carry
a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV- (Protective
Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics
modules.
WARNING
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous
voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can result
in death or severe injury.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not used
(e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power
supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and start
work.
NOTICE
Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools.
Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment.
• Be sure to only use screwdrivers which exactly match the heads of the screws.
• Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation.
• Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor and
speed limitation system.
NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.
WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
In the event of fire outbreak, the enclosures of built-in devices cannot prevent the escape of
fire and smoke. This can result in serious personal injury or property damage.
• Install built-in units in a suitable metal cabinet in such a way that personnel are protected
against fire and smoke, or take other appropriate measures to protect personnel.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.
WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Converters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. Electromagnetic fields may
interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the immediate
vicinity of an converter are at risk.
• As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons with
active implants.
• Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by radio devices or mobile phones
Using radio devices or mobile telephones in the immediate vicinity of the components can
result in equipment malfunction. Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines
and can therefore put people in danger or lead to property damage.
• Therefore, if you move closer than 20 cm to the components, be sure to switch off radio
devices or mobile telephones.
• Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already been
switched off.
NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault in
the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground. If you use
motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line conductors,
you must perform the following measures:
• IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
• TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.
WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire
and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased
downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.
NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
• Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.
WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.
NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including
all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and
activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.
Note
Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the Safety
Integrated manuals.
WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
• Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.
NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum
foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with
ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states in
your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with suitable
protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.
Chapter In this section you will find answers to the following questions:
Description (Page 27) • How is the converter marked?
• Which components make up the converter?
• Which optional components are available for the converter?
• What is the purpose of the optional components?
• Which motors can be fed from the converter?
• Which commissioning tools are there?
Installing (Page 57) • Which sequence is recommended when installing the converter?
• What does EMC-compliant installation actually mean?
• Which options are available to install optional components below the converter?
• What are the converter dimensions?
• Which mounting and installation materials are required when installing the con‐
verter?
• To which line supplies can the converter be connected?
• How is the converter connected to the line supply?
• How is the braking resistor connected to the converter?
• Which terminals and fieldbus interfaces does the converter have?
• What are the interface functions?
Commissioning (Page 157) • Which motor data is required for commissioning
• How is the converter set in the factory?
• What is the commissioning procedure?
• How do you restore the converter factory settings?
Uploading the converter set‐ • Why is it necessary to back up the converter settings?
tings (Page 211) • Which options are available to back up the settings?
• How does the data backup function?
• How do you prevent the converter settings from being changed?
• How do you prevent the converter settings from being read out?
Protecting the converter set‐ • How do I protect the converter settings against manipulation?
tings (Page 223) • How do I protect my know-how, which is embedded in the converter settings, so that
it cannot be copied by unauthorized persons?
Advanced commissioning • Which functions are included in the converter firmware?
(Page 233) • How are the functions set?
Corrective maintenance • What is the meaning of the LEDs provided on the converter?
(Page 453) • How does the system runtime respond?
• How does the converter save alarms and faults?
• What do the converter alarms and faults mean?
• How are converter faults resolved?
• Which I&M data is saved in the converter?
Chapter In this section you will find answers to the following questions:
Alarms, faults and system • How are converter components replaced?
messages (Page 433) • How is the firmware version of the converter changed?
• What must be done after a converter replacement if the safety functions of the
converter are active?
Technical data (Page 481) • What is the converter technical data?
• What do "High Overload" and "Low Overload" mean?
• What effect do the installation altitude or ambient temperature have on the con‐
verter, for example?
Appendix (Page 557) • What are the new functions of the current firmware?
• How is the converter operated using the BOP-2 Operator Panel?
• How can signal interconnections be changed in the converter firmware?
• What does "BiCo technology" mean?
• Where can I find additional information about the converter?
Use of OpenSSL
This product contains software developed in the OpenSSL project for use within the OpenSSL
toolkit.
This product contains cryptographic software created by Eric Young.
This product contains software developed by Eric Young.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
OpenSSL (https://www.openssl.org/)
Cryptsoft (mailto:eay@cryptsoft.com)
The following data is provided on the Power Module type plate (①):
• Designation, e.g. PM240-2 Power Module
• Technical specifications: voltage and current
• Article number, e.g. 6SL3210-1PE21-1UL0
• Version, e.g. A02
The following data can be found on the Control Unit type plate (②):
• Designation, e.g. Control Unit CU240E-2 DP-F
• Article number, e.g. 6SL3244-0BB13-1PA0
• Version, e.g. A02 (hardware), 4.7 (firmware)
Description
The following directives and standards are relevant for the converters:
Directive 2011/65/EU
The converter fulfills the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU relating to the restriction of the
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices (RoHS).
Eurasian conformity
The converters comply with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/Kazakhstan customs union
(EAC).
DNV-GL
The SINAMICS CUA20 Control Unit Adapter Kit facilitates DNV-GL-certified cabinet designs.
China RoHS
The converters comply with the China-RoHs directive. Further information is provided on the
Internet:
China RoHS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109738656)
Quality systems
Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.
Further information
Shield connection kit 1 for the CU230P‑2 Control Units with all fieldbus 6SL3264-1EA00-0FA0
interfaces except for PROFINET.
Shield connection kit 3 for the CU230P‑2 and CU240E‑2 Control Units 6SL3264-1EA00-0HB0
with PROFINET interface.
• PM240-2 • PM250
30,3
)6')6)
30,3
)6$)6&
Figure 3-1 PM230, 3-phase 400 VAC, degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12
Table 3-2 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3223-0DE…
30
)6')6*
30
)6$)6&
PM230, 3-phase 400 VAC in IP20 degree of protection for pump and fan applications
The PM230 Power Module in IP20 degree of protection is available without a filter or with an
integrated class A line filter.
Table 3-3 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article numbers: 6SL3210-1NE…
Table 3-4 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1RE…
Table 3-5 3-phase 500 VAC … 690 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1RH…
30)6*;
The PM330 Power Module is available as an unfiltered device. External line filters are available
as an option, see Section
Table 3-6 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article numbers: 6SL3310-1PE…
Frame size GX HX JX
Power (kW) 160 … 250 315 … 400 450 … 560
Table 3-7 3-phase 500 VAC … 690 VAC, article numbers: 6SL3310-1PG…
Frame size HX JX
Power (kW) 315 … 450 500 … 630
Figure 3-4 Examples of Power Modules with Push-Through technology FSA … FSC
Table 3-8 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3211-1NE…
Table 3-9 1-phase/3-phase 200 VAC … 240 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1PB… and 6SL3210-1PC…
Table 3-10 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1PE…
Table 3-11 3-phase 500 VAC … 690 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1PH…
Table 3-12 1-phase/3-phase 200 VAC … 240 VAC, article number 6SL3211-1PB…
Table 3-13 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3211-1PE…
Table 3-15 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3225-0BE…
Establish the shield and strain relief for the power connec‐
tions using the shield connection kit.
The shield connection kit comprises a shield plate and ser‐
rated strips with screws.
NOTICE
Overloading the line filter when connected to line supplies that are not permissible
The line filter is only suitable for operation on TN or TT line supplies with a grounded neutral
point. If operated on other line supplies, the line filter will be thermally overloaded and will be
damaged.
• For converters equipped with line filter, only connect to TN or TT line supplies with a
grounded neutral point.
External line filters for the PM330 Power Module, 500 V … 690 V
The line requirements for deployment of a line reactor depends on the Power Module:
Technical data (Page 481)
Output reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings and
the load placed on the inverter as a result of capacitive recharging
currents in the cables.
An output reactor is required for the following motor cable lengths:
• For PM330 Power Module:
– ≥ 100 m shielded
– ≥ 200 m unshielded
• All other Power Modules:
– ≥ 50 m shielded
– ≥ 100 m unshielded
The figure on the right-hand side shows as example the output reactors
for PM240-2 Power Modules, FSB and FSC.
NOTICE
The output reactor is damaged if the inverter pulse frequency is too high
The output reactors are designed for a specific pulse frequency. The output reactor can
overheat if the inverter is operated with excessive pulse frequencies. Excessively high
temperatures damage the output reactor.
• Operate the inverter only with an output reactor with the permissible pulse frequencies:
– PM330 Power Modules HX and JX: Pulse frequency ≤ 2.5 kHz
– All other Power Modules: Pulse frequency ≤ 4 kHz
dv/dt filters plus VPL for PM240‑2 Power Modules, 380 V … 480 V
dv/dt filters plus VPL for PM240‑2 Power Modules, 500 V … 690 V
The sine-wave filter at the converter output limits the voltage rate-of-
rise and the peak voltages at the motor winding. The maximum
permissible length of motor feeder cables is increased to 300 m.
The following applies when using a sine-wave filter:
• Operation is only permissible with pulse frequencies from 4 kHz
to 8 kHz.
From 110 kW power rating of the Power Modules (according to
the type plate) only 4 kHz is permissible.
• The converter power is reduced by 5%.
• The maximum output frequency of the converter is 150 Hz at 380 V to 480 V.
• Operation and commissioning may only be performed with the motor connected, as the
sine-wave filter is not no-load proof.
• An output reactor is superfluous.
Power Module Power du/dt filter plus VPL du/dt filter compact plus
VPL
GX 6SL3310-1PE33-0AA0, 160 kW … 6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0 6SL3000-2DE35-0EA0
6SL3310-1PE33-7AA0, 250 kW
6SL3310-1PE34-6AA0
HX 6SL3310-1PE35-8AA0, 315 kW … 6SL3000-2DE38-4AA0 6SL3000-2DE38-4EA0
6SL3310-1PE36-6AA0, 400 kW
6SL3310-1PE37-4AA0
JX 6SL3310-1PE38-4AA0, 450 kW … 6SL3000-2DE41-4AA0 6SL3000-2DE41-4EA0
6SL3310-1PE38-8AA0, 560 kW
6SL3310-1PE41-0AA0
Power Module Power du/dt filter plus VPL du/dt filter compact plus
VPL
JX 6SL3310-1PG35-8AA0, 500 kW … 6SL3000-2DH38-1AA0 6SL3000-2DG38-1EA0
6SL3310-1PG36-5AA0, 630 kW
6SL3310-1PG37-2AA0
The braking resistor allows loads with a high moment of inertia to be quickly braked.
Inverters with power up to 132 kW have an integrated Braking Module that controls
the braking resistor.
A Braking Module is available as option for inverters with more power.
An example for a braking resistor is shown at the side.
Overview
When using the CUA20 Control Unit Adapter Kit, the Control Unit can be installed next to the
PM240-2 Power Module.
Article No: 6SL3255-0BW01-0NA0
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
$GDSWHUIRU
&RQWURO8QLW
$GDSWHUIRU3RZHU
0RGXOHV
&RQWURO8QLW
3RZHU0RGXOH
Figure 3-5 Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20
The SINAMICS CUA20 Control Unit Adapter Kit comprises the following components:
• Adapter which is snapped onto the Power Module
• Adapter for the Control Unit
• Prefabricated cable to connect the two adapters
NOTICE
Insulation failure due to unsuitable third-party motor
A higher load occurs on the motor insulation in converter mode than with line operation.
Damage to the motor winding may occur as a result.
• Please observe the notes in the System Manual "Requirements for third-party motors"
Multi-motor operation
Multi-motor operation involves simultaneously operating several motors from one converter.
For standard induction motors, multi-motor operation is generally permissible.
Additional preconditions and restrictions relating to multi-motor operation are available on the
Internet:
Multi-motor drive (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84049346)
Description
Figure 4-1 Adhesive label with danger and warning notes for North America
The converter is supplied with an adhesive label with danger and warning notes for the North
American market.
Attach the adhesive label in the required language to the inside of the control cabinet where it
is clearly visible at all times.
EMC zones
/LQHVXSSO\ &RQWUROFDELQHW
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV
/LQHUHDFWRURUOLQHILOWHU 9SRZHUVXSSO\
+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO
&RQYHUWHU V\VWHP
&RQQHFWLRQRIVHQVRUV
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU HJSRVLWLRQSUHVVXUHRU
VLQHZDYHILOWHU WHPSHUDWXUH
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
'ULYHQPDFKLQH
&RQWUROFDELQHW &RQWUROFDELQHW
7UDQVIRUPHU
0RXQWLQJSODWH
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV
/LQHILOWHU (OHFWULFDOO\
/
FRQGXFWLYH
/
&RQYHUWHU FRQQHFWLRQV
/ WKURXJKDODUJH
1 VXUIDFHDUHD
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU
3( VLQHZDYHILOWHU
6KLHOGVXSSRUW
3( 3(
(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
'ULYHQPDFKLQH
3(
)RXQGDWLRQ
Figure 4-3 Grounding and high-frequency equipotential bonding measures in the control cabinet and
in the plant/system
Further information
Additional information about EMC-compliant installation is available in the Internet:
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
4.2.2 Cables
Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference are connected
to the converter:
• Cables with a high level of interference:
– Cable between the line filter and converter
– Motor cable
– Cable at the converter DC link connection
– Cable between the converter and braking resistor
• Cables with a low level of interference:
– Cable between the line and line filter
– Signal and data cables
&RQWUROFDELQHW
0RXQWLQJSODWH
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV
/LQHILOWHU
&RQQHFWVKLHOG
&RQYHUWHU (OHFWULFDOO\
FRQGXFWLYH
FRQQHFWLRQV
&RQQHFWVKLHOG WKURXJKDODUJH
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU VXUIDFHDUHD
VLQHZDYHILOWHU
&RQQHFWVKLHOG
6KLHOGVXSSRUW
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
Figure 4-4 Routing converter cables inside and outside a control cabinet
6KLHOGSODWH
%DUHVKLHOG
7RRWKHG
WDSH
0RXQWLQJSODWH
+RVHFODPS
• Attach the shield to the shield support directly after the cable enters the cabinet.
• Do not interrupt the shield.
• Only use metallic or metallized plug connectors for shielded data cables.
Installing
Rules for admissible mounting:
• Only mount the Power Module in a vertical position with the motor connectors at the bottom.
4.4.2 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM230 Power Module, IP55
The following dimension drawings are not to scale.
'H
GWK SWK
:L
E
F
K
+HLJKW
Figure 4-6 Dimension drawing, PM230 Power Module IP55, FSA … FSC
:LGWK
'H
E
SW
F
K
+HLJKW
Figure 4-7 Dimension drawing, PM230 Power Module IP55 FSD … FSF
4.4.3 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM230 Power Module, IP20
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
'H E
WK WK
:LG 'H :LG SW
K
SWK
F
&8
23
&8
F
23
+HLJKWZLWKRXW
VKLHOGSODWH
+HLJKWZLWKRXWVKLHOG
K
K
SODWH
6KLHOGSODWH
)6$
6KLHOG
SODWH )6%)6&
Table 4-5 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted
'H
WK SWK
:LG
&8
23
E
F
+HLJKW
K
6KLHOGSODWH
Table 4-7 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted 1)
4.4.4 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for PM240P-2 Power Modules, IP20
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
F
2
3
+HLJKWZLWKRXWVKLHOGSODWH
K
+HLJKWZLWKVKLHOGSODWH
6KLHOG
SODWH
'H
SW
K
Table 4-9 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted 1)
Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top Bottom Front
FSD 430 170 7 300 350 100 4 x M5 / 6.0
FSE 509 230 8.5 300 350 100 4 x M6 / 10
FSF 680 270 13 300 350 100 4 x M8 / 25
1)
The Power Module is designed for mounting without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.
4.4.5 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for the Power Module PM330, IP20
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
*; +;
+HLJKW
'H GW K
SW K :L
-;
Table 4-11 Dimensions, cooling air clearances [mm] and fastening [Nm]
4.4.6 Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM240-2 Power Module,
IP20
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
'H E
WK WK
:LG 'H :LG SW
K
SWK
F
&8
23
&8
F
23
+HLJKWZLWKRXW
VKLHOGSODWH
+HLJKWZLWKRXWVKLHOG
K
K
SODWH
6KLHOGSODWH
)6$ 6KLHOG
)6%)6&
SODWH
Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top Bottom Front
FSA 186 62.3 6 80 100 100 3 x M4 / 2.5
FSB 281 80 6 80 100 100 4 x M4 / 2.5
FSC 343 120 6 80 100 100 4 x M5 / 3.5
1)
The Power Module is designed for mounting without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm
F
2
3
+HLJKWZLWKRXWVKLHOGSODWH
K
+HLJKWZLWKVKLHOGSODWH
6KLHOG
SODWH
'H
SW
K
Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top 2) Bottom 2) Front
FSD 430 170 7 300 350 100 4 x M5 / 6.0
FSE 509 230 8.5 300 350 100 4 x M6 / 10
Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top 2) Bottom 2) Front
FSF 680 270 13 300 350 100 4 x M8 / 25
FSG 970.5 265 15 300 350 100 4 x M8 / 25
1)
The Power Module is designed for mounting without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm
2)
The top and bottom cooling air clearances refer to the Power Module without shield plate
4.4.7 Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM250 Power Module
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
&8
23
Table 4-16 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted
Frame Mounting depth in the cabinet with Control Unit (CU) [mm]
size without OP with OP 1)
FSC 224 235
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover
'H
WK SWK
:LG
&8
23
E
F
+HLJKW
K
6KLHOGSODWH
Table 4-18 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted 1)
4.4.8 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for PM230 and PM240-2 Power
Modules utilizing push-through technology
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.
WK
:LG 'H (OHFWULFDOFDELQHWFXWRXWDQGPRXQWLQJKROHV
7 SW
K
7
& E
8
F
2 E PP
3
D
D
PP
)6$ )6&
D
D
)6%
D
D
G
+HLJKW
D
D
H H
D
D
F
F
0RXQWLQJKROHIRUWKHPRXQWLQJIUDPH
6KLHOG
SODWH
Figure 4-8 Dimension drawing and drilling dimensions for frame sizes FSA ... FSC
Table 4-20 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted
&XWRXWVRIWKHFRQWUROFDELQHWDQGPRXQWLQJKROHV
7
& 8
23
WK
:LG
)6'
)6)
+HLJKW3RZHU0RGXOH
෪PP
+HLJKWWRWDO
෪PP
6KLHOGSODWH
)6(
0RXQWLQJKROHIRUWKHPRXQWLQJ
IUDPH
7
7
'HS
WK
෪PP
Figure 4-9 Dimension drawing and drilling dimensions for frame sizes FSD ... FSF
Table 4-23 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted 1)
WARNING
Electric shock when the motor terminal box is open
As soon as the converter is connected to the line supply, the motor connections of the converter
may carry dangerous voltages. When the motor is connected to the converter, there is danger
to life through contact with the motor terminals if the motor terminal box is open.
• Close the motor terminal box before connecting the converter to the line supply.
Note
Fault protection when insulation fails in the motor circuit at the output side
In case of insulation failure in the motor circuit, the overcurrent trip of the converter meets the
requirements of IEC 60364-4-41:2005/AMD1:2017 Section 411 and Annex D for protection
against electric shock.
• Observe the installation specifications for this converter.
• Ensure the continuity of the protective conductor.
• Observe the applicable installation standards.
7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU
Note
Operation in IEC or UL systems
For installations in compliance with IEC, operation on TT line systems is permissible. For
installations in compliance with UL, operation on TT line systems is not permissible.
4.5.1.3 IT system
7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU
Note
690 V converters: Output reactors for frame sizes FSD and FSE
An output reactor is required for 690 V converters in frame sizes FSD and FSE.
WARNING
Electric shock due to interrupted protective conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor. Touching
conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death or serious
injury.
• Dimension the protective conductor as stipulated in the appropriate regulations.
/
/
/
3(
/
/
/
3(
4.5.3 Connecting the inverter with the PM230 Power Module IP55
/
/ 3RZHU
/ 0RGXOH
3(
/ 8 8
/ 9 9
/ : : 0
3( 3(
Table 4-26 Connection types, maximum conductor cross-sections and tightening torques
PD[PLQෘ
6:[(
&
'
The EMC cable glands are not included in the scope of supply of the inverter. Rubber sleeves for
unused drill holes in the cable cover plate are included in the scope of supply.
Connecting the mains supply and motor, frame sizes FSA ... FSC
Procedure
1. Remove the front cover of the Power Module.
%ROWLQJSODWH
1P
&DEOHJODQGV
1P
5XEEHUVOHHYHV
3. Prepare the mains and motor cables for connection in accordance with the table below.
Motor cable 10 mm 50 mm 10 mm 40 mm
1)
Cable shield
① Gland plate
4. Assemble the cable glands with the prepared cables and EMC cable glands for the control
cables.
5. Seal any unused bushings with a rubber sleeve.
6. Secure the gland plate to the inverter enclosure. Tightening torque: 2 Nm
Make sure that the seal of the gland plate is not damaged.
7. Where necessary, fit the supplied ferrite ring onto the motor cable.
Ferrite rings are required to be able to comply with the limit values of IEC 61800-3, Category
C1 with reference to grid-bound interference voltages when using Power Modules with
integrated line filters.
If you use cables > 25 m, the requirements of Category C1 are no longer satisfied.
)6$ )6% )6&
Figure 4-15 Ferrite rings for the mains and motor cables
3( 8
:/ 9
9/ :
8/
0DLQVVXSSO\ 0RWRU
The Power Modules are equipped with removable plug connectors that cannot be
inadvertently interchanged. To remove the connectors, press the red lever to release the
interlock.
9. Fit the front cover of the Power Module.
Make sure that the seal of the front cover is not damaged.
Line supply and motor are connected to the FSA … FSC Power Modules.
❒
Connecting the mains supply and motor, frame sizes FSD … FSF
Procedure
1. Open the door of the Power Module.
2. Remove the terminal cover.
%ROWLQJSODWH
1P
&DEOHJODQGV
1P
5XEEHUVOHHYHV
4. Assemble the cable glands with the prepared cables and EMC cable glands for the control
cables.
5. Seal any unused bushings with a rubber sleeve.
6. Secure the gland plate to the inverter enclosure. Tightening torque 2 Nm.
Make sure that the seal of the gland plate is not damaged.
7. Connect the mains supply and the motor.
3( 8
:/ 9
9/ :
8/
0DLQVVXSSO\ 0RWRU
/ /
/ 9 9 9
/ /
/ : : :
/
/ 3( 3(
3( 3( 3(
/
3(
Figure 4-16 PM230 Power Module connection overview
Table 4-27 Connection, cross-section and tightening torque for PM230 Power Modules
0RWRU
/ / / 3( 89:
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
You must open the cover to connect the line and motor:
1. Release the catches on both sides of the covers using a screwdriver.
2. Swivel the covers upwards.
Close the covers once you have connected the line and motor.
/ /
9 9 9 9 9 9
/ /
: : : : : :
3( 3(
3( 3( 3(
3( 5 * & '&3
/
/ 5 + ' '&1
/
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU %UDNLQJ0RGXOH
Figure 4-17 Connecting the PM330 Power Module
You will find additional information about the PM330 Power Module in the Internet:
Hardware installation manual for PM330 Power Modules (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742506)
/ /
/ 9 9 9
/ /
/ : : :
/
/ 3( 3(
3( 3( 3(
/
3(
Figure 4-18 PM240P-2 Power Module connection overview
Table 4-28 Connection, cross-section and tightening torque for PM240P-2 Power Modules
)6')6( )6)
In addition, for frame sizes FSD and FSE, release the two terminal screws on the connections for
the motor and remove the dummy plug.
For frame size FSF you must breakout the openings from the connection cover for the power
connections. Use side cutters or a fine saw blade.
)6')6( )6)
/
/ 8
/ 9 / 8
: / 9
/ :
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
You must re-attach the connection covers in order to re-establish the touch protection of the
converter after it has been connected up.
3( 5 5
/ 5 '&35
/
/
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
Figure 4-21 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 3 AC, FSA … FSC
3( 5 5
/ 5 '&35
1
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
Figure 4-23 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 1 AC 200 V, FSA … FSC
,QYHUWHU 2XWSXWUHDFWRURU
G8GWILOWHU
/ 8 8 8
/ 9 9 9
/ : : :
3( 3( 3(
'&3
'&1
3( 5 5
5 5 ) '&16 8
'&36 9
/
1 3( :
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU 9ROWDJH3HDN/LPLWHU
Figure 4-24 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 1 AC 200 V, FSD … FSF
Table 4-29 Connection, cross-section and tightening torque for PM240-2 Power Modules
/LQHVXSSO\
%UDNLQJ
UHVLVWRU 0RWRU
FSD, FSE: Remove the lower cover FSF, FSG: Remove the lower cover
6KLHOGSODWH
RSWLRQDO
5
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU 5
6KLHOGSODWH
RSWLRQDO )
)
5
6KLHOGSODWH 5 %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
RSWLRQDO
)
5 %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
5
)6*
)6)
)6')6(
/ 8
/ 8 / 9
/ / 9 :
/ /
/ 8 :
/ 9
:
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
Figure 4-25 Connections for the line supply, motor and braking resistor
You must re-attach the connection covers in order to re-establish the touch protection of the
converter after it has been connected up.
Note
Conductor cross-section 240 mm2
Cable lugs for M10 bolts according to SN71322 are suitable for cables with cross-sections of
35 mm2 … 185 mm2 (1 AWG … 2 × 350 MCM).
If you wish to establish connections with cables of 240 mm2 (500 MCM), you must use narrow
cable lugs, e.g. Klauke 12SG10. Other cable lugs are not suitable due to the narrow design of the
converter.
The maximum permissible width of the cable lugs is 37 mm (1.45 inches).
Remove the plastic insulating plate as shown below to gain better access to the terminals for the
power connections.
WARNING
Damage to converter as a result of operation without insulating plates
Without the insulating plates, voltage flashovers may occur between the phases.
• Replace the insulating plates after connecting the cables.
/ /
/ 9 9 9
/ /
/ : : :
/
/ 3( 3(
3( 3( 3(
/
3(
Figure 4-26 Connecting the PM250 Power Module
Table 4-30 Connection, cross-section and tightening torque for PM250 Power Modules
Converter Line supply and motor connection Cross-section and tightening torque Stripped
Metric Imperial insula‐
tion
length
FSC Screw-type terminal 4 …10 mm2, 2.3 Nm 12 … 8 AWG, 20 lbf in 10 mm
FSD 10 … 35 mm , 6 Nm
2
7 … 2 AWG, 53 lbf in --
FSE 25 … 50 mm2, 6 Nm 3 … 1 AWG, 53 lbf in --
Cable lug
FSF 35 … 120 mm , 13 Nm 2 … 4/0 AWG, 115 lbf in
2
--
/ / /
89:
3(
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
/ / / 3( 89:
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
You must open the cover to connect the line and motor:
1. Release the catches on both sides of the covers using a screwdriver.
2. Swivel the covers upwards.
Close the covers once you have connected the line and motor.
Overview
Standard induction motors up to a rated power of approximately 3 kW are usually connected in
star/delta connection (Y/Δ) at 400 V/230 V. For a 400‑V line supply, you can connect the motor
to the converter either in a star or in a delta connection.
Function description
Procedure
1. Place the two catches of the Control Unit in the matching grooves of the Power Module.
2. Press the Control Unit onto the Power Module until you hear that it latches.
The Control Unit is plugged onto the Power Module.
❒
Procedure
Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module by pressing the release mechanism.
To insert or detach the Control Unit, you must open the left-hand
cover of the Power Module.
Close the cover before you commission the inverter.
Special features for the PM230 Power Module IP55, FSA … FSC
9HUELQGXQJVOHLWXQJ]XP2SHUDWRU3DQHO
7HPS,
;
Current or temper‐
ature input
; ⑨ Connection to the operator panel
;
;
;
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from manipulation of the converter software
Manipulation of the converter software can cause unsafe operating states in your system that
may lead to death, serious injury and property damage.
• Prevent unauthorized persons from accessing the converter's USB interface:
– Do not route the USB interface outside the control cabinet.
– Lock the control cabinet or the control room in which the converter is installed.
;
9,1 99RSWLRQDOSRZHUVXSSO\
*1',1 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
9RXW 9RXWSXWPD[P$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
$,1, 6HQVRU3W/*1LRUDQDORJLQSXW
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
9H[W $,1, 6HQVRU3W/*1L
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
ุN˖ $, $QDORJLQSXW99P$P$
*1' H[W $, 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
$2 $QDORJRXWSXW9ಹ9P$ಹP$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
;
9H[W 9RXW 9RXWSXWPD[P$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
ุN˖ $, $QDORJLQSXW99P$P$
*1' H[W $, 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
$2 $QDORJRXWSXW9ಹ9P$ಹP$
*1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
'212
'LJLWDORXWSXWPD[$9'&
'2&20
; 702725
'21& 702725 7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU37&.7<3WELPHWDOOLF
'212 9RXW 9RXWSXWPD[P$
'2&20 *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
; ',&20 5HIHUHQFHIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV
'21& ',
'212 ', 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
'2&20 ', IRUFRQQHFWLRQ3RU0VZLWFKLQJFRQWDFW
', ORZ9KLJK!9PD[9
'LJLWDORXWSXWV ',
PD[$9'& ',
$9$&
1)
The following applies to systems compliant with UL: Maximum current, 3 A 30 VDC or 2 A 250 VAC
Figure 4-27 Wiring the digital inputs with p-switching contacts and an internal 24 V power supply (terminal 9)
*1' All terminals labelled with reference potential "GND" are connected internally in the inverter.
',&20 Reference potential "DI COM" is electrically isolated from "GND". The Control Unit is delivered
with a jumper between terminals 28 and 69.
→ If, as shown above, you wish to use the 24‑V supply from terminal 9 as supply for the digital
inputs, then it is mandatory that this jumper is used.
9,1 When an optional 24 V power supply is connected at terminals 31, 32, even when the Power
*1',1 Module is disconnected from the line supply, the Control Unit remains in operation. The Control
Unit thus maintains fieldbus communication, for example.
→ for terminals 31, 32 only use a 24 VDC power supply with PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage).
→ for applications in the USA and Canada: Use a 24 VDC power supply, NEC Class 2.
→ connect the 0 V of the power supply with the protective conductor.
→ if you also wish to use the power supply at terminals 31, 32 for the digital inputs, then you
must connect "DI COM" and "GND IN" with one another at the terminals.
$, You may use the internal 10 V power supply or an external power supply for the analog inputs.
$, → When you use the internal 10 V power supply, you must connect AI 0 or AI 1 with "GND".
$,
$,
Additional options for wiring the digital inputs
;
9H[W '212
*1' H[W '2&20 You must remove the jumper between
terminals 28 and 69 if it is necessary to
have electrical isolation between the ex‐
9RXW ternal power supply and the internal in‐
; *1'
'21& verter power supply.
',&20
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
; ',
'21& ',
'212 ',
'2&20 ',
Note
When a contact switching to M is connected, a ground fault at the digital input can lead to the
input being unintentionally controlled.
;
+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO 9,1
*1',1
9RXW
*1'
1,$,
1RIXQFWLRQ
*1'
1,$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
*1'
$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
$,
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXHP$P$
352),%86 *1'
352),1(7 &RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
; &RQWUROYLDWHUPLQDOVWULS
9RXW
*1'
$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
$,
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXHP$P$
*1'
'212
$ODUP
'2&20
702725 1RIXQFWLRQ
702725
9RXW
*1'
',&20 1RIXQFWLRQ
; ',
-RJJLQJ
'21& 1RIXQFWLRQ
'212 )DXOW ', -RJJLQJ
'2&20
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
;
', 6ZLWFKRYHUFRQWURODQGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
'21&
'212 1RIXQFWLRQ
'2&20 ',
7HOHJUDP3='
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
-RJJLQJRU ',
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
DO x: p073x AO 0: p0771[0] DI x: r0722.x
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Figure 4-28 Factory setting of the CU230P-2 DP and CU230P-2 PN Control Units
;
9,1
*1',1
9RXW
*1'
1,$,
1RIXQFWLRQ
*1'
1,$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
*1'
$, 1RIXQFWLRQ
$,
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXHP$P$
*1'
;
9RXW
*1'
$,
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW99
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXHP$P$
*1'
'212
$ODUP
'2&20
702725 1RIXQFWLRQ
702725
; 9RXW
*1'
'21& ',&20
'212 )DXOW ', 212))
'2&20
', 5HYHUVHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
; ', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'21& ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'212 1RIXQFWLRQ ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
'2&20 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
DO x: p073x AO 0: p0771[0] DI x: r0722.x AI 0: r0755[0]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Figure 4-29 Factory setting of CU230P-2 HVAC Control Units
', &RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
', &RQWUROYLDWHUPLQDOVWULS
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
',
', -RJJLQJ
', ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
', -RJJLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 6ZLWFKRYHUFRQWURODQGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
',
7HOHJUDP3='
', 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
-RJJLQJRU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Jog 1 speed setpoint: p1058, factory setting: 150 rpm
Jog 2 speed setpoint: p1059, factory setting: -150 rpm
Designation in the BOP-2: FB cdS
', 212))
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUUDLVH
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Std MoP
', 212))
', 5HYHUVLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: Std ASP
&RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
3=' 1RIXQFWLRQ
',
3=' 212))
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
3=' 1RIXQFWLRQ
', 3=' 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU023UDLVH
3=' 1RIXQFWLRQ
',
3=' 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU
3='
3='
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
3='
023
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1], p1070[1] = 1050
Switch controller via PZD01, bit 15: p0810 = r2090.15
Designation in the BOP-2: Proc Fb
', 212))
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 6ZLWFKRYHUVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU023KLJKHU
', ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU
',
$,
0 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
',
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0], p1070[1] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Proc
', 212))FORFNZLVH
', 212))FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 2-wIrE 1
', 212))FORFNZLVH
', 212))FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 2-wIrE 2
', (QDEOH2))
', 21FORFNZLVH
', 21FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 4: r0722.4 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 3-wIrE 1
', (QDEOH2))
', 21
', 5HYHUVLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 4: r0722.4 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 3-wIrE 2
866EDXG3='3.:YDULDEOH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: FB USS
', ุ 212))
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', (VVHQWLDOVHUYLFHPRGHVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
ุ
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
RU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
$,
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5 AI 0: r0755[0]
DO 2: p0732
Additional settings:
• Fixed speed setpoint 1: p1001 = 800 rpm
• Fixed speed setpoint 2: p1002 = 1000 rpm
• Fixed speed setpoint 3: p1003 = 1200 rpm
• If several of the DI 3 ... DI 5 = high, the inverter adds the corresponding fixed speeds.
• Fixed speed setpoint 15 for essential service mode (ESM): p1015 = 1500 rpm
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F 6PA
', 212))
)L[HGYDOXH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
3 $, 3UHVVXUHVHQVRU99ฬ
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0 AI 0: r0755[0]
Additional settings:
• Differential pressure control using the technology controller
• Technological unit: p0595 = 1 (%), reference variable: p0596 = 1
• Default setting of the technology controller:
– Enable: p2200 = 1
– Fixed value 1: p2201 = 50 %
– Ramp-up/down time for setpoint: p2257 = p2258 = 30 s
– Ramp-up/down time for controller output: p2293 = 30 s
– Upper and lower limits, actual value: p2267 = 120 %, p2268 = -10 %
– Actual value filter time constant: p2265 = 10 s
– Proportional gain KP, integral time TI, differentiation time constant TD: p2280 (KP) = 1,
p2285 (TI) = 30 s, p2274 (TD) = 0 s
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F dPc
', (VVHQWLDOVHUYLFHPRGH
)L[HGYDOXH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQWIRUHVVHQWLDO
VHUYLFHPRGH
3 $, 3UHVVXUHVHQVRU99ฬ
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0 AI 0: r0755[0]
Additional settings:
• Pressure control using the technology controller
• Analog inputs smoothing time constant: p0753 = 500 ms
• Technological unit: p0595 = 1 (%), reference variable: p0596 = 1
• Default setting of the technology controller:
– Enable: p2200 = 1
– Fixed value 1: p2201 = 40 %
– Ramp-up/down time for setpoint: p2257 = p2258 = 30 s
– Ramp-up/down time for controller output: p2293 = 30 s
– Upper and lower limits, actual value: p2267 = 120 %, p2268 = -10 %
– Actual value filter time constant: p2265 = 10 s
– Proportional gain KP, integral time TI, differentiation time constant TD: p2280 (KP) = 1.2,
p2285 (TI) = 25 s, p2274 (TD) = 0 s
– Technology controller minimum limiting p2292 = 30 %
– Technology controller output signal start value p2302 = 35 %
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F Stw
Default setting 105: "Fan pressure control + ESM with fixed setpoint"
', 212))
', (VVHQWLDOVHUYLFHPRGHVSHHGVHWSRLQW
)L[HGYDOXH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
3 $, 3UHVVXUHVHQVRU99ฬ
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, DI 1: r0722.1 AI 0: r0755[0]
DO 2: p0732
Additional settings:
• Pressure control using the technology controller
• Analog inputs smoothing time constant: p0753 = 500 ms
• Technological unit: p0595 = 1 (%), reference variable: p0596 = 1
• Fixed speed setpoint 15 for essential service mode (ESM): p1015 = 1350 rpm
• Default setting of the technology controller:
– Enable: p2200 = 1
– Fixed value 1: p2201 = 40 %
– Ramp-up/down time for setpoint: p2257 = p2258 = 30 s
– Ramp-up/down time for controller output: p2293 = 30 s
– Upper and lower limits, actual value: p2267 = 120 %, p2268 = -10 %
– Actual value filter time constant: p2265 = 10 s
– Proportional gain KP, integral time TI, differentiation time constant TD: p2280 (KP) = 1.1,
p2285 (TI) = 35 s, p2274 (TD) = 0 s
– Technology controller minimum limiting p2292 = 20 %
– Technology controller output signal start value p2302 = 50 %
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F Pc5
', 212))
)L[HGYDOXH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
$, 7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU99ฬ
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0 AI 0: r0755[0]
Additional settings:
• Temperature control using the technology controller
• Analog inputs smoothing time constant: p0753 = 100 ms
• Technological unit: p0595 = 1 (%), reference variable: p0596 = 1
• Default setting of the technology controller:
– Enable: p2200 = 1
– Fixed value 1: p2201 = 26 %
– Ramp-up/down time for setpoint: p2257 = p2258 = 30 s
– Ramp-up/down time for controller output: p2293 = 30 s
– Upper and lower limits, actual value: p2267 = 120 %, p2268 = -10 %
– Actual value filter time constant: p2265 = 10 s
– Proportional gain KP, integral time TI, differentiation time constant TD: p2280 (KP) = 1.2,
p2285 (TI) = 25 s, p2274 (TD) = 0 s
– Technology controller system deviation inversion: p2306 = 1
• Default setting hibernation mode:
– Activated: p2398 = 1
– Start speed: p2390 = 50 rpm
– Delay time: p2391 = 60 s
– Restart value with technology controller: p2392 = 1 %
– Restart speed relative w/o technology controller: p2393 = 100 rpm
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F ctF1
', 212))
)L[HGYDOXH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
$, 7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU/*1L
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0 AI 3: r0755[3]
Additional settings:
• Temperature control using the technology controller
• Analog inputs smoothing time constant: p0753 = 100 ms
• Technological unit: p0595 = 1 (%), reference variable: p0596 = 1
• Default setting of the technology controller:
– Enable: p2200 = 1
– Fixed value 1: p2201 = 26 %
– Ramp-up/down time for setpoint: p2257 = p2258 = 30 s
– Ramp-up/down time for controller output: p2293 = 30 s
– Upper and lower limits, actual value: p2267 = 120 %, p2268 = -100 %
– Actual value filter time constant: p2265 = 10 s
– Proportional gain KP, integral time TI, differentiation time constant TD: p2280 (KP) = 1.2,
p2285 (TI) = 25 s, p2274 (TD) = 0 s
– Technology controller minimum limiting p2292 = 20 %
– Technology controller system deviation inversion: p2306 = 1
• Default setting hibernation mode:
– Activated: p2398 = 1
– Start speed: p2390 = 50 rpm
– Delay time: p2391 = 60 s
– Restart value with technology controller: p2392 = 1 %
– Restart speed relative w/o technology controller: p2393 = 100 rpm
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F ctF2
&RQWUROYLD866EDXG3='3.:
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F USS
&RQWUROYLD0RGEXV578EDXG
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F Mod
&RQWUROYLD%$&QHW0673EDXG
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F bAc
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
ุ 212))
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3
Additional settings:
• Fixed speed setpoint 1: p1001 = 300 rpm
• Fixed speed setpoint 2: p1002 = 600 rpm
• Fixed speed setpoint 3: p1003 = 900 rpm
• Fixed speed setpoint 4: p1004 = 1200 rpm
• If several of the DI 0 ... DI 3 = high, the inverter adds the corresponding fixed speeds.
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F _F55
', )L[HGYDOXH
', )L[HGYDOXH
ุ 212))
)L[HGYDOXHRU 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&2 $, &2VHQVRU99ฬ
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
'2 2SHUDWLRQ
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
DO 2: p0732
Additional settings:
• CO2 control using the technology controller
• Analog inputs smoothing time constant: p0753 = 500 ms
• Technological unit: p0595 = 1 (%), reference variable: p0596 = 1
• Default setting of the technology controller:
– Enable: p2200 = 1
– Fixed value 1: p2201 = 50 %
– Fixed value 3: p2203 = 10 %
– Technology controller setpoint 1: p2253 = r2224 (active fixed value)
– Ramp-up/down time for setpoint: p2257 = p2258 = 30 s
– Upper and lower limits, actual value: p2267 = 120 %, p2268 = -10 %
– Actual value filter time constant: p2265 = 10 s
– Technology controller system deviation inversion: p2306 = 1
• "Flying restart" is enabled: p1200 = 1
• Automatic restart is active. After a power failure, the inverter automatically acknowledges possible
faults and switches on the motor: p1210 = 26
Designation in the BOP-2: P_F_CO2
', 212))
$, $FWXDOYDOXH99
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&RQWUROYLDILHOGEXV3EDXG
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
'2 )DXOW
'2 $ODUP
$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, …, DO 2: p0732 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Designation in the BOP-2: p_f_P1
'2 0DLQFRQWDFWRUFRQWURO
DO 2: p0732
Designation in the BOP-2: L13
', 2))
', 2))
DI 4: r0722.4, DI 5: r0722.5
Designation in the BOP-2: L57_60
', ([WHUQDODODUP
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
DI 2: r0722.2, DI 3: r0722.3
Designation in the BOP-2: L83_86
Overview
The PM330 Power Module has 4 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs on terminal strip X9.
7HUPLQDOVWULS;
Function description
;
9H[W 3 ([WHUQDOVXSSO\99PD[$
*1'H[W 0 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
([WHUQDO$OHUW ([WHUQDODODUP 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
([WHUQDOIDXOW ([WHUQDOIDXOW ORZ9KLJK!9PD[9
6WRS 2)) LQSXWFXUUHQWP$DW9
6WRS 2))
0 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
'&/LQN&KDUJHG 0HVVDJH8'&OLQNLVORDGHG9'&PD[P$
$&9 1& 1RWFRQQHFWHG
1&
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU 0DLQFRQWDFWRUFRQWURO9$&FRV˳ LQGPD[
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU $
Connection cross-section: 0.2 mm² … 2.5 mm², tightening torque: 0.5 Nm (5 lb.in)
Use insulated end sleeves according to DIN 46228-4.
Terminals Remark
1 You may either connect an external 24 V supply or use the internal 24 V supply.
3…6 The function of the digital inputs is shown in the factory setting.
You can change the function of the digital inputs subsequently.
The digital inputs are low-active in the factory setting. If you do not use one of the digital inputs, you must
connect the digital input with 24 V.
8, 11, 12 The function of the digital outputs cannot be changed.
8 The digital output signals a fully charged DC link of the converter. A charged DC link is the precondition for the
"operation" converter state.
11, 12 A device to protect against overload and short-circuit is required for the power supply to the line contactor
control, e.g. a 4 A / 250 V fuse.
Connect the excitation coil of the line contactor to a surge suppressor, e.g. an RC element.
Figure 4-31 Terminal strip X9 with external 24 V supply
;
3
0
([WHUQDO$OHUW
([WHUQDOIDXOW 6XPPDWLRQRIWKHORDGRQ;DQG;PD[bP$
6WRS
6WRS
0
'&/LQN&KDUJHG
1&
1&
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU
$FWLYDWLRQ/LQH&RQWDFWRU
Figure 4-32 Terminal strip X9 with internal 24 V supply
Overview
You can implement safety function "Safe Torque Off" (STO) using the following Power Modules:
• PM240-2 Power Modules, FSD … FSG
• PM240P-2 Power Modules, FSD … FSF
• PM330 Power Module
Requirement
The higher-level control system monitors the selection of STO and the feedback from the
converter.
Application examples for "Safe Torque Off" (Page 140)
Setting the feedback signal for Safe Torque Off (Page 256)
Function description
Use an SELV or PELV power supply with 24 V DC (20.4 V … 28.8 V, maximum 60 V briefly).
Use a shielded cable with the following properties:
• Cable length ≤ 30 m
• Cross section 0.5 mm2 … + 1.5 mm2 (20 … 16 AWG)
• Insulated for 600 V
• Conductor end sleeves, stripping length 7 mm
Tightening torque: 0.2 Nm (2 lbf in)
&RQQHFWRU$WRVHOHFW672
6ZLWFKWRHQDEOHRUGLVDEOH672
&RQQHFWRU%WRVHOHFW672
&RQQHFWRUIRU%UDNH5HOD\RU6DIH%UDNH5HOD\
2. Connect the cable for selecting STO to terminals STO_A and STO_B.
3. Plug in the Control Unit.
4. Connect the cables for the STO feedback signal to 2 digital outputs of the Control Unit.
5. Attach the shield to the shield plate of the Control Unit through the largest possible surface
area.
You have connected all cables for the STO safety function.
❒
6ZLWFKHVWRHQDEOHRUGLVDEOH672
&RQQHFWLRQ$WRVHOHFW672
&RQQHFWLRQ%WRVHOHFW672
)HHGEDFNVLJQDO$WRVHOHFW672
)HHGEDFNVLJQDO%WRVHOHFW672
1. Connect the cable for selecting STO to terminals X41:STO_A and X41:STO_B.
2. Connect the cables for STO feedback to terminals X41:FB_A and X41:FB_B.
3. Attach the shield to the shield plate through the largest possible surface area.
You have connected all cables for the STO safety function.
❒
Overview
A higher-level control system is required to select the STO safety function.
Requirement
The following requirements apply:
• The converter signals that the STO safety function is being controlled to the higher-level
control system using two digital outputs.
– For converters with PM240-2 and PM240P-2 Power Modules, you must interconnect
feedback signals "STO is active" with two digital outputs.
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
– For converters with PM330 Power Modules, you can use terminal strip -X41.
• The higher-level control system monitors the selection of the STO safety function and the
feedback from the converter.
• Forced checking procedure (test stop):
The higher-level control system regularly selects the STO safety function and evaluates the
converter feedback signal.
We recommend that you implement a time monitoring function in the higher-level control
system, which issues an alarm if a test stop is overdue.
• Suitable higher-level controllers
– SIRIUS 3SK1: Single-channel static feedback circuit
Permissible for converters FSH and FSJ, not permissible for FSA … FSG
– SIRIUS 3SK2: Two-channel dynamic feedback circuit
– MSS 3RK3: Two-channel dynamic feedback circuit
– SIMATIC: Feedback circuit monitoring in the safety program
• Forced checking procedure (test stop) every 3 months
Function description
9'&
;
6WDUW
672B$
$ ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 7 ,1
672B%
)6
/RJLF
)%B$
$XWRVWDUW
0RQLWRUHG6WDUW
)%B%
$ 6.$%
Figure 4-35 Connection 3SK1 inside a control cabinet for FSGX, FSHX and FSJX
'212
9'&
'2&20
'212
'2&20
9
672B$
6WDUW 9
9
672B%
$ 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 9
/RJLF
Figure 4-36 Connection 3SK2 inside a control cabinet for FSD … FSG
)4
W
,1
7 W
)4
W
,1
7 7 W
T1 ≥ 30 ms In case of deviating feedback, the safety relay must select the STO function and
T2 ≥ 20 ms indicate an error.
Figure 4-37 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback signal for FSD … FSG
;
672B$
672B%
)%B$
9'& )%B%
6WDUW
$ 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
/RJLF
Figure 4-38 Connection 3SK2 inside a control cabinet for FSGX, FSHX and FSJX
When starting, static monitoring of the STO feedback signal is sufficient for converters FSGX,
FSHX and FSJX.
6WDUW
'212
7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 '2&20
'212
'2&20
9
672B$
9
/RJLF
9
672B%
9
5.
$
4 4 4 / 0 $
9'&
0
Figure 4-39 Connection 3RK3 inside a control cabinet for FSD … FSG
4
W
,1
7 W
4
W
,1
7 7 W
T1 ≥ 30 ms In case of deviating feedback, the Modular Safety System must select the STO
T2 ≥ 20 ms function and indicate an error.
Figure 4-40 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback signal for FSD … FSG
6WDUW
;
7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 672B$
672B%
)%B$
/RJLF
)%B%
5.
$
4 4 4 / 0 $
9'&
0
Figure 4-41 Connection 3RK3 inside a control cabinet for FSGX, FSHX and FSJX
When starting, static monitoring of the STO feedback signal is sufficient for converters FSGX,
FSHX and FSJX.
)',[9'& 9'&
'212
6 '2&20
'212
'2&20
9
672B$
9
9
672B%
9
0
)'4[9'&$330
Figure 4-42 Connecting the SIMATIC S7-1500 in a control cabinet for FSD … FSG
)'4
W
)',
7 W
)'4
W
)',
7 7 W
T1 ≥ 30 ms In case of deviating feedback, the SIMATIC must select the STO function and
T2 ≥ 20 ms indicate an error.
Figure 4-43 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback signal for FSD … FSG
)'4[9'&$330 9'&
;
672B$
672B%
)%B$
6
)%B%
)',[9'& 0
Figure 4-44 Connecting the SIMATIC S7-1500 in a control cabinet for FSGX, FSHX and FSJX
Static monitoring of the STO feedback signal when STO is selected is sufficient for converters
FSGX, FSHX and FSJX.
Further information
Further information is provided on the Internet:
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16381/man)
SIRIUS 3SK2 Safety Relays (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109444336)
SIRIUS 3RK3 modular safety system manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
en/view/26493228)
S7-1500 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384)
ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942)
ET 200pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/22098524)
ET 200S (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/12490437)
S7-300 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19026151)
WARNING
Electric shock due to unsuitable power supply
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched in the event of a fault.
• For all connections and terminals of the electronic boards, only use power supplies that
provide PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) or SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) output
voltages.
WARNING
Electric shock due to unsuitable motor temperature evaluation system
Voltage flashovers to the electronics of the converter can occur in motors without safe
electrical separation of the temperature sensors in accordance with IEC 61800‑5‑1 when the
motor develops a fault.
• Install a temperature monitoring relay 3RS1… or 3RS2…
• Evaluate the temperature monitoring relay output using a digital input of the converter, e.g.
using the "External fault" function.
You can find additional information about the temperature monitoring relay on the Internet:
Manual 3RS1 / 3RS2 temperature monitoring relays (https://support.industry.siemens.com/
cs/ww/en/view/54999309)
Note
Malfunction caused by incorrect switching states as the result of diagnostic flows in the
off state (logical state "0")
In contrast to mechanical switching contacts, e.g. emergency stop switches, diagnostic flows
can also flow with semiconductor switches in the off state. If interconnection with digital inputs
is faulty, the diagnostic flows can lead to incorrect switching states and thus to a malfunction of
the drive.
• Observe the conditions for digital inputs and digital outputs specified in the relevant
manufacturers documentation.
• Check the conditions of the digital inputs and digital outputs in regard to the flows in off
state. If applicable, connect the digital inputs with suitably dimensioned, external resistors
to protect against the reference potential of the digital inputs.
In order to install the converter in compliance with UL, you may only connect the DO 0 and DO 2
relay outputs of the Control Unit using copper wires approved for 75 °C.
WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged insulation
Damaged insulation of cables carrying hazardous voltages can cause a short circuit with cables
carrying non-hazardous voltages. This can have the effect that parts of the converter or the
installation carry an unexpectedly high voltage.
• Use only cables with double insulation for 230 V cables which you connect to the digital
outputs of the converter.
NOTICE
Overvoltages for long signal cables
Using > 30 m long cables at the converter's digital inputs and 24 V power supply or inductive
circuits at the digital inputs can lead to overvoltage. Overvoltages can damage the converter.
• Connect an overvoltage protection device between the terminal and the associated
reference potential.
We recommend using the Weidmüller overvoltage protection terminal with designation
MCZ OVP TAZ DIODE 24VDC.
Solid or finely stranded conductor Finely stranded conductor with Finely stranded conductor with
non-insulated conductor end partially insulated conductor end
sleeve sleeve
PP PP PP
PP PP PP
WARNING
Fire caused by an unsuitable or incorrectly installed braking resistor
Using an unsuitable or improperly installed braking resistor can cause fires and smoke to
develop. Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage.
• Only use braking resistors that are approved for the converter.
• Install the braking resistor in accordance with regulations.
• Monitor the temperature of the braking resistor.
Procedure
1. Connect the temperature monitoring system of the braking resistor (terminals T1 and T2 on
the braking resistor) to a free digital input on the inverter.
7 9RXW
7 ', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
5 *1'
5 ',&20
'&35 ,QYHUWHUZLWKWKH30
5 303RZHU0RGXOHV
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
7 9RXW
7 ', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
5 *1'
5 ',&20
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU * ,QYHUWHUZLWKWKH303RZHU
+ 0RGXOH
Figure 4-45 Example: Temperature monitoring of the braking resistor via digital input DI 3 on the
Control Unit
2. Define the function of the digital input used as an external fault with p2106.
As an example with temperature monitoring via digital input DI 3: p2106 = 722.3.
The inverter monitors the braking resistor temperature.
❒
Overview
The Control Units are available in different versions for communication with higher-level
controls with the fieldbus interfaces listed as follows:
PROFINET ✓ ✓ ✓ CU230P-2 PN
EtherNet/IP 1)
--- ---
PROFIBUS ✓ --- ✓ CU230P-2 DP
USS 1)
--- --- CU230P-2 HVAC
Modbus RTU 1) --- ---
BACnet MS/TP 1) --- ---
P1 1) --- ---
1)
Information about these fieldbuses, profiles and communication types can be found in the
Fieldbus Function Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
352),1(7
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6*
*' 6,1$0,&6*&
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6*;
*0
• MRP: Media redundancy, impulsed with 200 ms. Precondition: Ring topology
With MRP, you get an uninterrupted switchover if you set the failure monitoring time to a
value > 200 ms.
• MRPD: Media redundancy, bumpless. Precondition: IRT and the ring topology created in the
control
• Diagnostic alarms in accordance with the error classes specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
• Device replacement without removable data storage medium: The replacement converter is
assigned the device name from the IO controller, not from its memory card or from the
programming device.
• Shared Device for converters that support PROFIsafe.
3&
(WKHUQHW
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6*
*' 6,1$0,&6*&
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6*;
*0
Further information on the operation as Ethernet nodes can be found in the Function Manual
"Fieldbuses".
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Procedure
1. Integrate the converter in the bus system (e.g. ring topology) of the control using PROFINET
cables and the two PROFINET sockets X150-P1 and X150-P2.
Overview of the interfaces (Page 112)
The maximum permitted cable length from the previous station and to the next one is 100 m.
2. Externally supply the converter with 24 VDC through terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control should also run
when the line voltage is switched off.
You have connected the converter to the control system via PROFINET.
❒
Communication with the control system even if the line voltage is switched off
You must supply the converter with 24 V DC at terminals 31 and 32 if you wish to maintain
communication with the control system when the line voltage is switched off.
In the case of brief interruptions of the 24 V power supply, the converter may signal a fault
without communications with the control system being interrupted.
Device name
In addition to the MAC address and IP address, PROFINET also uses the device name to identify
PROFINET devices (Device name). The device name must be unique across the PROFINET
network.
To assign the device name, you need an engineering software, e.g. HW-Config.
The converter saves the device name on the inserted memory card.
IP address
In addition to the device name, PROFINET also uses an IP address.
You have the following options to specify the IP address of the converter:
• You specify the IP address using engineering software, e.g. via HW Config.
• The IO Controller assigns an IP address to the converter.
Telegram
Set the same telegram in the converter as in the IO Controller. Interconnect the telegrams in the
control program of the IO Controller with the signals of your choosing.
Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET (Page 270)
Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFINET communication on the Internet:
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500 (TO) via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)
Procedure
1. Save the GSDML to your PC.
– With Internet access:
GSDML (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/26641490)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSDML as a zipped file (*.zip) into directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/
DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSDML file on your computer.
3. Import the GSDML into the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSDML in the engineering system of the controller.
352),%86'3
6,1$0,&6*
6,1$0,&6*' 6ODYH
6ODYH
Procedure
1. Connect the converter to socket X126 via a PROFIBUS cable with the higher-level control.
Overview of the interfaces (Page 112)
The maximum permitted cable length to the previous station or the subsequent one is 100 m
at a baud rate of 12 Mbit/s.
2. If necessary, connect a 24 V supply voltage to terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communication with the control may not be
interrupted even if the line voltage is switched off.
You connected the converter with the control via PROFIBUS.
❒
Communication with the control system even if the line voltage is switched off
You must supply the converter with 24 V DC at terminals 31 and 32 if you wish to maintain
communication with the control system when the line voltage is switched off.
In the case of brief interruptions of the 24 V power supply, the converter may signal a fault
without communications with the control system being interrupted.
Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFIBUS communication on the Internet:
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500 (TO) via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)
Procedure
1. Save the GSD on your PC using one of the following methods.
– With Internet access:
GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133100)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSD as zipped file (*.zip) into directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/
DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSD file on your computer.
3. Import the GSD in the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSD file in the engineering system of the controller.
Procedure
1. Set the address using one of the subsequently listed options:
– Via the address switch
– With a commissioning tool via p0918
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
The PROFIBUS address is set.
❒
Overview
:FT 1FSGPSNFYUFOEFE
DPNNJTTJPOJOH
#BDLJOHVQEBUB
$PNNJTTJPOJOHJT
DPNQMFUFE
Operator panel
An operator panel is used to commission, troubleshoot and control the converter, as well as to
back up and transfer the converter settings.
The Intelligent Operator Panel (IOP‑2) can either be snapped onto a converter, or is available
as handheld device with a connecting cable to the converter. The graphics-capable plain text
display of the IOP‑2 enables intuitive converter operation.
Additional information on the IOP‑2 is available in the Internet:
SINAMICS IOP-2 release for sale (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109747625)
The Operator Panel BOP‑2 for snapping onto the converter has a two-line display for
diagnostics and operating the converter.
Operating Instructions of the BOP-2 and IOP-2 operator panels:
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Smart Access
Smart Access is snapped onto a converter, and is a web server-based operating unit with wireless
connection to a PC, tablet or smartphone. Smart Access is used to commission and maintain the
converter.
You can find additional information about Smart Access on the Internet:
SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109758122)
PC tools
STARTER and Startdrive are PC tools that are used to commission, troubleshoot and control the
converter, as well as to back up and transfer the converter settings. You can connect the PC with
the converter via USB or via the PROFIBUS / PROFINET fieldbus.
Connecting cable (3 m) between PC and converter: Article number 6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0
Startdrive DVD: Article number 6SL3072-4CA02-1XG0
Startdrive, system requirements and download (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109752254)
Startdrive tutorial (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73598459)
STARTER, system requirements and download (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26233208)
,(&
,(&
1(0$
1(0$
6SHHG
3RZHU
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
Figure 5-1 Example of the rating plate for a standard induction motor
Description
You may have to reform the DC link capacitors if the Power Module has been stored for more than
one year. When the converter is operational, DC link capacitors that have not been formed can
be damaged.
Table 5-1 The forming duration depends on how long the converter was stored for
The production date of the Power Module is coded in the 3rd and 4th digit of the serial number
on the rating plate: "S X ‑- ③ ④ X X X…"
Procedure
1. Set p0010 = 2.
2. Set the forming duration p3380.
For p3380 > 0, with alarm A07391, the inverter signals that at the next on command, DC link
forming starts.
3. Switch on the motor, e.g. from an inserted operator panel.
4. Wait for the forming time to elapse. r3381 indicates the remaining time.
If the line voltage is switched off before forming has been completed, then you must again
form the DC link.
5. The inverter sets p3380 = 0.
6. Set p0010 = 0.
Parameter
Parameter Description
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter (factory setting: 0)
0: Ready
2: Power unit commissioning
p3380 DC link forming, forming duration (factory setting: 0 h)
p3380 = 0 deactivates the function.
If the forming duration is changed while forming, then forming restarts with the modi‐
fied forming duration.
r3381 DC link forming, remaining time [h]
Remaining forming time.
r3382 DC link forming, status word
.00 1 signal: Forming activated
.01 1 signal: Forming active
.02 1 signal: Forming completed
.03 1 signal: Forming faulty
The inverter signals fault F07390
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRI\HDUV
8>@
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRI\HDUV
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRIDQGPRUH\HDUV
W>K@
Figure 5-3 Forming the DC-link capacitors
Motor
In the factory, the converter is set for an induction motor matching the rated power of the Power
Module.
Converter interfaces
The inputs and outputs and the fieldbus interface of the converter have specific functions when
set to the factory settings.
Factory interface settings (Page 116)
212))
W
0RWRUVSHHG
PLQ
6HWSRLQW
5DPSXS 5DPSGRZQWLPH W
WLPH
The ramp-up and ramp-down times define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed
setpoint changes. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are derived from the time between motor
standstill and the maximum speed, or between the maximum speed and motor standstill.
For a control command at the respective digital input, the motor rotates with ±150 rpm. The
same ramp-up and ramp-down times as described above apply.
-RJ
-RJ W
W
0RWRUVSHHG
USP
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVHLVLQKLELWHG W
Figure 5-5 Jogging the motor in the factory setting
Procedure
1. Locate the lower edge of the Operator Panel into the matching recess of the Control Unit.
2. Plug the Operator Panel onto the converter until the latch audibly engages.
The operator panel is plugged onto the Control Unit.
❒
The operator panel is ready for operation when you connect the converter to the power supply.
Overview
6WDUWTXLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
3DUDPHWHUVWREH
VHW
S S S
N: 9 (QWHUWKHGULYHGDWD
$ PLQ S S S
S S S
S S S
6HOHFWWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ
S
6HOHFWWKHPRWRUFRQWUROPRGH
S
6HOHFWWKHGHIDXOWVHWWLQJRIWKH
LQYHUWHULQWHUIDFHV S
6HOHFWWKHPRWRUGDWDLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
S
" PHWKRG
6WDUWPRWRUGDWDLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
7KHLQYHUWHURSWLPL]HVWKHFORVHGOR
RSPRWRUFRQWURO
4XLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJKDVEHHQ
FRPSOHWHG
Requirement
The following requirements apply:
• The supply voltage is switched on.
• The operator panel displays setpoints and actual values.
Function description
Procedure
Press the ESC key.
Press one of the arrow keys until the BOP-2 displays menu .
We recommend resetting the converter to the factory setting before commencing quick
commissioning.
Should you wish to change the default setting of the interfaces, the converter must be reset to
the factory settings now.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the OK key.
2. Switch over the display using an arrow key: →
3. Press the OK key.
Whether the converter offers the selection of the application class, depends on the Power
Module being used:
• PM230 or PM250 Power Module:
The converter skips the step .
• PM240‑2, PM240P‑2 or PM330 Power Modules:
select the application class:
Quick commissioning with application classes (Page 173)
Select the motor standard:
• IEC
• NEMA, US units
• NEMA, SI units
Specify the overload capability of the converter:
• Duty cycle with "high overload"
• Duty cycle with "low overload"
Overload capability of the converter (Page 484)
Set the converter supply voltage.
Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motor cooling:
• : Natural cooling
• : Forced-air cooling
• : Liquid cooling
• : Without fan
Select the appropriate application:
• In all applications that do not fit the other setting options.
• Applications involving pumps and fans
• Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times.
• Applications involving pumps and fans with optimized efficiency. The setting
only makes sense for steady-state operation with slow speed changes. We recommend
setting if load surges during operation cannot be ruled out.
• Applications with high break loose torque
The selection option depends on the Power Module being used. There is no selection option for
PM230 Power Modules.
Select the control mode:
• : U/f control with linear characteristic
• : Flux current control (FCC)
• : U/f control with square-law characteristic
• : Sensorless vector control
Control mode U/f control with linear or square-law character‐ Sensorless vector control
istic
Flux current control (FCC)
Closed-loop con‐ • Typical settling time after a speed change: • Typical settling time after a speed change:
trol characteristics 100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
• Typical settling time after a load surge: 500 ms • Typical settling time after a load surge: 200 ms
/RDG /RDG
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
• The control mode is suitable to address the
• The vector control controls and limits the motor
following requirements:
torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
• Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5 % for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depend‐ 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the motor power rating):
• We recommend vector control for the following
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
applications:
– Applications with steady load torque with‐
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
out load surges
– For load surges 10 % … >100 % of the rated
• The control mode is insensitive with respect to
motor torque
imprecise setting of the motor data
• The vector control is necessary for a ramp-up
time 0 → Rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (630 kW).
Application exam‐ • Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow char‐ • Pumps and compressors with displacement ma‐
ples acteristic chines
Motors that can Induction motors Induction, synchronous and reluctance motors
be operated
Control mode U/f control with linear or square-law character‐ Sensorless vector control
istic
Flux current control (FCC)
Power Modules No restrictions
that can be oper‐
ated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz
quency 150 Hz with PM330 Power Module
Commissioning • Contrary to vector control, no speed controller
has to be set
Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
I
S
S
6HWSRLQW
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20 % of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
I
IPD[
3
6HWSRLQW
3 3 W
Motor data identification: Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of
the connected motor:
• : Motor data is not measured.
• : Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill and with the
motor rotating. The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has
been completed.
• : Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if one of the following cases is applicable:
– You have selected control mode ; however, the motor cannot rotate freely.
– You have selected U/f control as control mode, e.g. or
• : Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the
motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
Complete the data entry for quick commissioning as follows:
1. Switch over the display using an arrow key: →
2. Press the OK key.
You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of the converter.
❒
5.4.3.1 Overview
6WDUWTXLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
3DUDPHWHUVWREH
VHW
6HOHFWWKH
DSSOLFDWLRQFODVV S
6WDQGDUG'ULYH&RQWURO ([SHUW
'\QDPLF'ULYH&RQWURO 6HOHFWWKHPRWRUFRQWUROPRGH
S
6HOHFWWKHGHIDXOWVHWWLQJRIWKH
FRQYHUWHULQWHUIDFHV S
6HOHFWWKHPRWRUGDWDLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
" PHWKRG S
6WDUWPRWRUGDWDLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
7KHFRQYHUWHURSWLPL]HVWKH
FORVHGORRSPRWRUFRQWURO
4XLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJKDVEHHQ
FRPSOHWHG
Overview
When selecting an application class, the converter assigns the appropriate settings to the motor
control.
If you do not set the application class, but instead setting "Expert", then you must define the
appropriate closed-loop motor control setting.
Requirement
You are using one of the following Power Modules:
• PM240‑2
• PM240P‑2
• PM330
If you are using a different Power Module, then BOP-2 does not show step . Perform
commissioning without application class.
Starting quick commissioning (Page 167)
Function description
Select one of the application classes or setting "Expert":
• Standard Drive Control (Page 176)
• Dynamic Drive Control (Page 178)
• Expert (Page 181)
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
• "Standard Drive Control" is suitable to address
• "Dynamic Drive Control" controls and limits the
the following requirements:
motor torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
• Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5 % for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depend‐ 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the motor power rating):
• We recommend "Dynamic Drive Control" for the
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
following applications:
– Applications with steady load torque with‐
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
out load surges
– For load surges 10 % … >100 % of the rated
• "Standard Drive Control" is insensitive with re‐
motor torque
spect to imprecise setting of the motor data
• "Dynamic Drive Control" is necessary for a ramp-
up time 0 → rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (132 kW).
Application exam‐ • Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow char‐ • Pumps and compressors with displacement ma‐
ples acteristic chines
Power Modules PM240‑2, PM240P-2 PM240‑2, PM240P-2 PM330
that can be oper‐
ated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz 150 Hz
quency
Motors that can Induction motors Induction, synchronous and reluctance motors
be operated
Commissioning • Unlike "Dynamic Drive Control," no speed con‐ • Reduced amount of parameters when compared
troller needs to be set to "Expert"
• When compared to "Expert": • "Dynamic Drive Control" is preset for Power Mod‐
– Simplified commissioning using prede‐ ules frame size D … frame size JX
fined motor data
– Reduced number of parameters
• "Standard Drive Control" is preset for Power
Modules, frame size A … frame size C
Function description
Select the motor standard:
• IEC
• NEMA, US units
• NEMA, SI units
Set the converter supply voltage.
Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate:
• Third-party induction motor
• 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate:
• 1LE1 induction motor . 9
• 1PC1 induction motor
• 1PH8 induction motor
• Reluctance motor
Depending on the converter, the motor list in BOP‑2 can deviate from the list shown above.
If you have selected a motor type with motor code, you must now enter the motor code. The
converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the motor code = 0, and enter motor data
from p0304 and higher from the rating plate.
87 Hz motor operation The BOP‑2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor
standard (P100 = ).
Rated motor voltage
Motor cooling:
• Natural cooling
• Forced-air cooling
• Liquid cooling
• Without fan
Select the basic setting for the motor control:
• Constant load
• Speed-dependent load
Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20 % of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
I
S
S
6HWSRLQW
I
IPD[
3
6HWSRLQW
3 3 W
Motor data identification: Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of
the connected motor:
• No motor data identification
• Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely.
• Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• Setting the same as
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
• Setting the same as
After the motor data identification, the motor accelerates to the current setpoint.
Complete the data entry for quick commissioning as follows:
1. Switch over the display using an arrow key: →
2. Press the OK key.
You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of the converter.
❒
Function description
Select the motor standard:
• : IEC
• : NEMA, US units
• : NEMA, SI units
Set the converter supply voltage.
Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate:
• : Third-party induction motor
• : 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
Motor cooling:
• : Natural cooling
• : Forced-air cooling
• : Liquid cooling
• : Without fan
Select the basic setting for the motor control:
• : Recommended setting for standard applications
• : Recommended setting for applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down
times.
• : Recommended setting for applications with a high break loose torque.
The BOP-2 does not display this step for a PM330 Power Module.
Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20 % of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
I
S
S
6HWSRLQW
I
IPD[
3
6HWSRLQW
3 3 W
Motor data identification: Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of
the connected motor:
• : Motor data is not measured
• : Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill and with the
motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• : Default setting: Measure the motor data at standstill.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely.
5.4.3.5 Expert
Function description
Select the motor standard:
• IEC
• NEMA, US units
• NEMA, SI units
Specify the overload capability of the converter:
• Duty cycle with "high overload"
• Duty cycle with "low overload"
Overload capability of the converter (Page 484)
Set the converter supply voltage.
Select the motor type. If a 5-digit motor code is stamped on the motor rating plate, select the
corresponding motor type with motor code.
Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate:
• Third-party induction motor
• 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate:
• 1LE1 induction motor . 9
• 1PC1 induction motor
• 1PH8 induction motor
• Reluctance motor
Depending on the converter, the motor list in BOP‑2 can deviate from the list shown above.
If you have selected a motor type with motor code, you must now enter the motor code. The
converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the motor code = 0, and enter motor data
from p0304 and higher from the rating plate.
87 Hz motor operation The BOP‑2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor
standard (P100 = ).
Rated motor voltage
Motor cooling:
• : Natural cooling
• : Forced-air cooling
• : Liquid cooling
• : Without fan
Select the appropriate application:
• In all applications that do not fit the other setting options.
• Applications involving pumps and fans
• Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times.
• Applications involving pumps and fans with optimized efficiency. The setting
only makes sense for steady-state operation with slow speed changes. We recommend
setting if load surges during operation cannot be ruled out.
• Applications with high break loose torque
Select the control mode:
• : U/f control with linear characteristic
• : Flux current control (FCC)
• : U/f control with square-law characteristic
• : Sensorless vector control
Control mode U/f control with linear or square-law character‐ Sensorless vector control
istic
Flux current control (FCC)
Closed-loop con‐ • Typical settling time after a speed change: • Typical settling time after a speed change:
trol characteristics 100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
• Typical settling time after a load surge: 500 ms • Typical settling time after a load surge: 200 ms
/RDG /RDG
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
• The control mode is suitable to address the
• The vector control controls and limits the motor
following requirements:
torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
• Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5 % for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depend‐ 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the motor power rating):
• We recommend vector control for the following
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
applications:
– Applications with steady load torque with‐
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
out load surges
– For load surges 10 % … >100 % of the rated
• The control mode is insensitive with respect to
motor torque
imprecise setting of the motor data
• The vector control is necessary for a ramp-up
time 0 → Rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (630 kW).
Application exam‐ • Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow char‐ • Pumps and compressors with displacement ma‐
ples acteristic chines
Motors that can Induction motors Induction, synchronous and reluctance motors
be operated
Power Modules No restrictions
that can be oper‐
ated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz
quency 150 Hz with PM330 Power Module
Commissioning • Contrary to vector control, no speed controller
has to be set
Select the default setting for the interfaces of the converter that is suitable for your application.
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
I
S
S
6HWSRLQW
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20 % of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
I
IPD[
3
6HWSRLQW
3 3 W
Motor data identification: Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of
the connected motor:
• : Motor data is not measured.
• : Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at standstill and with the
motor rotating. The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has
been completed.
• : Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if one of the following cases is applicable:
– You have selected control mode ; however, the motor cannot rotate freely.
– You have selected U/f control as control mode, e.g. or
• : Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the
motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
5.4.4 Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control
Overview
Using the motor data identification, the converter measures the data of the stationary motor. In
addition, based on the response of the rotating motor, the converter can determine a suitable
setting for the vector control.
To start the motor data identification routine, you must switch-on the motor via the terminal
strip, fieldbus or from the operator panel.
Requirements
• You have selected a method of motor data identification during quick commissioning, e.g.
measuring motor data while the motor is stationary.
When quick commissioning is complete, the converter issues alarm A07991.
• The motor has cooled down to the ambient temperature.
An excessively high motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results.
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion while the motor data identification is in progress
For the stationary measurement, the motor can make several rotations. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed. Secure dangerous machine parts
before starting motor data identification:
• Before switching on, ensure that nobody is working on the machine or located within its
working area.
• Secure the machine's work area against unintended access.
• Lower suspended loads to the floor.
Procedure
Enable the control priority via the operator panel.
If the converter again outputs alarm A07991, then it waits for a new ON command to start the
rotating measurement.
If the converter does not output alarm A07991, switch off the motor as described below, and
switch over the converter control from HAND to AUTO.
Switch on the motor to start the rotating measurement.
Overview
To be able to perform quick commissioning using a PC, you need to do the following:
1. Creating a project
2. Integrating the converter into the project
3. Go online and start the quick commissioning
Procedure
1. Start the Startdrive commissioning software.
2. In the menu, select "Project" → "New…".
3. Specify a name of your choice for the project.
You have created a new project.
❒
Procedure
1. Switch on the converter power supply.
2. First insert a USB cable into your PC and then into the converter.
3. The PC operating system installs the USB driver when you are connecting the converter and
PC together for the first time.
5. When the USB interface is appropriately set, then the "Accessible nodes" screen form shows
the converters that can be accessed.
If you have not correctly set the USB interface, then the following "No additional nodes
found" message is displayed. In this case, follow the description below.
6. Transfer the converter into the project using the menu: "Online - Upload device as new
station (hardware and software)".
You have transferred a converter accessible via the USB interface into your project.
❒
Procedure
When selecting an application class, the converter assigns the motor control with the
appropriate default settings:
• [1] Standard Drive Control (Page 192)
• [2] Dynamic Drive Control (Page 194)
• [0] Expert - or if no application class is listed:
Expert (Page 196)
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
• "Standard Drive Control" is suitable to address
• "Dynamic Drive Control" controls and limits the
the following requirements:
motor torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
• Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5% for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depend‐ 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the motor power rating):
• We recommend "Dynamic Drive Control" for the
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
following applications:
– Applications with increasing load torque
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
without load surges
– For load surges 10 % … >100 % of the rated
• "Standard Drive Control" is insensitive with re‐
motor torque
spect to imprecise setting of the motor data
• "Dynamic Drive Control" is necessary for a ramp-
up time 0 → rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (132 kW).
Application exam‐ • Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow char‐ • Pumps and compressors with displacement ma‐
ples acteristic chines
Power Modules PM240‑2, PM240P-2 PM240‑2, PM240P-2 PM330
that can be oper‐
ated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz 150 Hz
quency
Motors that can Induction motors Induction, synchronous and reluctance motors
be operated
Commissioning • Unlike "Dynamic Drive Control," no speed con‐ • Reduced amount of parameters when compared
troller needs to be set to "Expert"
• When compared to "Expert": • "Dynamic Drive Control" is preset for Power Mod‐
– Simplified commissioning using prede‐ ules frame size D … frame size JX
fined motor data
– Reduced number of parameters
• "Standard Drive Control" is preset for Power
Modules, frame size A … frame size C
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20% of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
Set the check mark for "RAM data to EEPROM (save data in the drive)" to save your data in the
converter so that it is not lost if the power fails.
Press the "Finish" button.
You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of the converter.
❒
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20% of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
Application:
• [0]: Recommended setting for standard applications.
• [1]: Recommended setting for applications with ramp-up and ramp-down times < 10 s. This
setting is not suitable for hoisting gear and cranes.
• [5] Recommended setting for applications with a high break loose torque.
Motor data identification:
• [0]: No motor data identification
• [1]: Recommended setting. Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [2]: Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot freely rotate, e.g. for a mechanically limited traversing
range.
• [3]: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the motor
after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [11]: The same setting as [1]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
• [12]: The same setting as [2]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
Set the check mark for "RAM data to EEPROM (save data in the drive)" to save your data in the
converter so that it is not lost if the power fails.
Press the "Finish" button.
You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of the converter.
❒
5.5.7 Expert
Procedure without application class or for the application class [0]: Expert
Select whether the converter is connected to a higher-level control via the fieldbus.
Select whether the ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint is implemented in the higher-
level control or in the converter.
Select the control mode.
Further information is provided at the end of the section.
Select the I/O configuration to preassign the converter interfaces.
Factory interface settings (Page 116)
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
Set the applicable motor standard and the converter supply voltage.
Application:
• "[0] Load cycle with high overload for applications requiring a high dynamic performance,
e.g. conveyor systems.
• "[1] Load cycle with low overload ..." for applications that do not require a high dynamic
performance, e.g. pumps or fans.
• [6], [7]: Load cycles for applications with encoderless 1FK7 synchronous motors.
The respective power module being used determines whether or not the selection is
displayed by the commissioning wizard.
If an optional component is installed between converter and motor, the corresponding setting
must be performed.
If a braking resistor is installed, you set the maximum braking power to which the braking
resistor will be subjected.
Select your motor.
Enter the motor data according to the rating plate of your motor.
If you have selected a motor based on its article number, the data has already been entered.
Select the temperature sensor for monitoring of the motor temperature.
Set the most important parameters to suit your application.
CAUTION
Material damage caused by unexpected acceleration of the motor
Depending on the Power Module, the converter sets the minimum frequency p1080 to 20% of
the maximum frequency. Also for setpoint = 0, the motor accelerates for p1080 > 0 to the
minimum frequency after switching on the motor. An unexpected acceleration of the motor
can cause material damage.
• If the application requires a minimum frequency = 0, then set p1080 = 0.
Application:
• [0]: In all applications that do not fall under [1] … [3]
• [1]: Applications involving pumps and fans
• [2]: Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times. However, this setting is not
suitable for hoisting gear and cranes/lifting gear.
• [3]: Setting only for steady-state operation with slow speed changes. We recommend setting
[1] if load surges in operation cannot be ruled out.
Motor identification:
• [1]: Recommended setting. Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [2]: Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Recommended setting for the following cases:
– You have selected "Speed control" as control mode, however the motor cannot freely
rotate, e.g. for mechanically limited traversing sections.
– You have set "U/f control" as control mode.
• [3]: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the motor
after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [11]: The same setting as [1]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
• [12]: The same setting as [2]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
Calculating the motor parameters: Select "Complete calculation".
Set the check mark for "RAM data to EEPROM (save data in the drive)" to save your data in the
converter so that it is not lost if the power fails.
Press the "Finish" button.
You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of the converter.
❒
Control mode U/f control with linear or square-law character‐ Encoderless vector control
istic
Flux current control (FCC)
Closed-loop con‐ • Typical settling time after a speed change: • Typical settling time after a speed change:
trol characteristics 100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
• Typical settling time after a load surge: 500 ms • Typical settling time after a load surge: 200 ms
/RDG /RDG
6SHHG W 6SHHG W
0RWRU W 0RWRU W
WRUTXH WRUTXH
PV W
PV
• The control mode is suitable to address the
• The vector control controls and limits the motor
following requirements:
torque
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW
• Torque accuracy that can be achieved: ± 5% for
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (depend‐ 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the motor power rating):
• We recommend vector control for the following
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
applications:
– Applications with increasing load torque
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
without load surges
– For load surges 10 % … >100 % of the rated
• The control mode is insensitive with respect to
motor torque
imprecise setting of the motor data
• The vector control is necessary for a ramp-up
time 0 → Rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
Application exam‐ • Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow char‐ • Pumps and compressors with displacement ma‐
ples acteristic chines
Motors that can Induction motors Induction, synchronous and reluctance motors
be operated
Power Modules No restrictions
that can be oper‐
ated
Max. output fre‐ 550 Hz 240 Hz
quency 150 Hz with PM330 Power Module
Commissioning • Contrary to vector control, no speed controller
has to be set
Overview
Using the motor data identification, the converter measures the data of the stationary motor. In
addition, based on the response of the rotating motor, the converter can determine a suitable
setting for the vector control.
To start the motor data identification routine, you must switch on the motor.
Requirements
• You have selected a method of motor data identification during quick commissioning, e.g.
measurement of the motor data while the motor is stationary.
When quick commissioning is complete, the converter issues alarm A07991.
• The motor has cooled down to the ambient temperature.
An excessively high motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results.
• The PC and converter are connected to each other online.
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion while the motor data identification is in progress
For the stationary measurement, the motor can make several rotations. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed. Secure dangerous machine parts
before starting motor data identification:
• Before switching on, ensure that nobody is working on the machine or located within its
working area.
• Secure the machine's work area against unintended access.
• Lower suspended loads to the floor.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Go online.
2. Select "Commissioning".
3. Select "Back up/reset".
4. Select "All parameters will be reset".
5. Press the "Start" button.
6. Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory settings.
You have reset the converter to the factory settings.
❒
Procedure
1. Select "Reset to factory settings"
2. 2.
3. Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory setting.
2.
Overview
Series commissioning is the commissioning of several identical converters. During series
commissioning, it is sufficient to commission one of the converters and then transfer the
settings of the first converter to additional converters.
Precondition
The following preconditions apply to the converters regarding series commissioning:
• All converters have the same article number
• The converters to which the settings are transferred have the same or a higher firmware
version as the source converter with the original settings.
Function description
Procedure
1. Commission the first converter.
2. Back up the settings of the first converter to an external storage medium.
Uploading the converter settings (Page 211)
3. Transfer the settings from the first converter to another converter via the data storage
medium.
Downloading the converter settings (Page 457)
Overview
2. 2. 2. 2. 2.
2.
6HWSRLQW
6SHHG
2XWSXWYROWDJH
,QFUHDVH
GHFUHDVH
'&OLQNYROWDJH VSHHG 2.
2.
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
6SHHG
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
6SHHG
1)
Status display once the power supply for the converter has been switched on.
Figure 5-16 Menu of the BOP-2
7KHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ
-RJLVDFWLYH
$QDODUPLVDFWLYH
)ODVKLQJV\PERO$IDXOWLVDFWLYH
0DVWHUFRQWURORIWKHLQYHUWHULVUHOHDVHGYLDWKH%23
Overview
The BOP‑2 offers the option of switching the motor on and off using the control keys.
Function description
Procedure
1. Enable the control priority via the operator panel.
Overview
You can modify the settings of the converter by changing the parameter values in the converter.
Precondition
The converter only permits changes to write parameters. Write parameters begin with a "P", e.g.
P45.
The value of a read-only parameter cannot be changed. Read-only parameters begin with an "r",
for example: r2.
Function description
Procedure
1. Select the menu to display and change parameter values.
2.
2.
3. When the parameter number flashes, select the desired parameter number.
2.
2.
Additional information
The converter immediately saves any changes so that they are protected against power failure.
Overview
For indexed parameters, several parameter values are assigned to a parameter number. Each of
the parameter values has its own index.
Precondition
You are in the menu for displaying and changing parameter values.
The number of an indexed parameter flashes in the BOP-2 display.
Function description
Procedure
1. Set the parameter index.
2. 2.
2.
Overview
The BOP‑2 offers the possibility of setting the parameter number digit by digit.
Precondition
You are in the menu for displaying and changing parameter values.
The number of a given parameter flashes in the BOP-2 display.
Function description
Procedure
1. Press the OK button until the first digit of the parameter number flashes.
2. V
2. 2.
3. After you have entered all of the digits of the parameter number, press the OK button.
You set the parameter number directly.
❒
Overview
The BOP‑2 offers the option of setting the parameter value digit by digit.
Precondition
You are in the menu for displaying and changing parameter values.
The parameter value flashes in the BOP-2 display.
Function description
Procedure
1. Press the OK button until the first digit of the parameter value flashes.
2. V
2. 2.
Overview
Whether or not a parameter value can be changed depends on the type of parameter and the
operating mode of the converter.
Function description
The converter indicates why it currently does not permit a parameter to be changed:
commissioning.
A parameter can only be
adjusted when the motor 2.
9
V 9
is switched off
Further information
For each parameter, the parameter list contains the operating state in which the parameter can
be changed.
Function description
Further information
Overview
We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the converter. The
converter automatically backs up its settings on the inserted memory card and always keeps it
up to date.
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched off.
Function description
Procedure
1. Insert an empty memory card into the converter.
Note
Accidental overwrite of the converter settings
When the supply voltage is switched on, the converter automatically accepts the settings
already backed up on the memory card. If you use a memory card on which settings are
already backed up, you will overwrite the settings of the converter.
• Use an empty memory card for the first automatic back-up of your settings.
Note
Unintentional firmware update
If the memory card contains a converter firmware, the converter may perform a firmware
update after the supply voltage has been switched on.
• Before inserting the memory card, ensure that it is empty.
Firmware upgrade and downgrade (Page 471)
Function description
The converter identifies that a memory card is not inserted, and signals this state. The message
is deactivated in the converter factory setting.
Activate message
Procedure
1. Set p2118[x] = 1101, x = 0, 1, … 19
2. Set p2119[x] = 2
Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is activated.
❒
To cyclically signal to the higher-level control that a memory card is not inserted, connect
parameter r9401 to the send data of the fieldbus interface.
Deactivate message
Procedure
1. Set p2118[x] = 1101, x = 0, 1, … 19
2. Set p2119[x] = 3
Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is deactivated.
❒
Parameter
Overview
If you insert the memory card into a converter that is already supplied with power, you must start
the upload manually using a commissioning tool.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.
• A memory card is inserted in the converter.
Function description
Procedure
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online & diagnostics".
3. Select "Back up/reset".
4. Back up the settings to the EEPROM of the converter.
5. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
6. Start data transfer
7. Wait until Startdrive signals that data backup has been completed.
You have backed up the converter settings to a memory card.
❒
Overview
If you insert the memory card into a converter that is already supplied with power, you must start
the upload manually using a commissioning tool.
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched on.
A memory card is inserted in the converter.
Function description
Procedure
1. Select the upload.
2. 2.
2. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
2.
4. Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the memory card.
2.
You have backed up the settings of the converter to the memory card.
❒
Function description
NOTICE
Data loss from improper handling of the memory card
If you remove the memory card when the converter is switched on without implementing the
"safe removal" function you may destroy the file system on the memory card. The data on the
memory card are lost. The memory card will only function again after formatting.
• Only remove the memory card using the "safe removal" function.
Procedure
1. Select the menu for changing parameter values.
2. 2.
3. The converter indicates whether it is currently writing data to the memory card:
– The converter sets p9400 = 100:
You must not remove the memory card. Wait for several seconds and then set p9400 = 2
again.
– The converter sets p9400 = 3:
Function description
NOTICE
Data loss from improper handling of the memory card
If you remove the memory card when the converter is switched on without implementing the
"safe removal" function you may destroy the file system on the memory card. The data on the
memory card are lost. The memory card will only function again after formatting.
• Only remove the memory card using the "safe removal" function.
Procedure
Overview
You can back up the converter settings on the BOP-2 operator panel.
Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched on.
Function description
Procedure
1. Select the upload to the operator panel.
2. 2.
Overview
You can backup the converter settings to a PC.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.
Function description
Procedure
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online" > "Upload device to PG/PC."
3. Back up the project with "Project" > "Save."
4. Wait until Startdrive signals that data backup has been completed.
5. Go offline.
You have backed up the settings.
❒
Function description
In addition to the default setting, the converter has an internal memory for backing up three
other settings.
On the memory card, you can back up 99 other settings in addition to the default setting.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Memory options (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/43512514)
Overview
The write protection prevents unauthorized changing of the converter settings.
Function description
Write protection is applicable for all user interfaces:
• Commissioning tool, e.g. operator panel or PC
• Parameter changes via fieldbus
No password is required for write protection.
Parameter
r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status
.00 1 signal: Write protection active
p7761 Write protection (factory setting: 0)
0: Deactivate write protection
1: Activate write protection
Parameter
Table 7-1 Parameters that can be changed with active write protection
Number Name
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection using LED / CU detect LED
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Sav par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8805 Identification and Maintenance 4 Configuration / I&M 4 Config
Number Name
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch
Note
Write protection for multimaster fieldbus systems
Via multimaster fieldbus systems, e.g. BACnet or Modbus RTU, in spite of write protection being
activated, parameters can still be changed. So that write protection is also active when accessing
via these fieldbuses, you must additionally set p7762 to 1.
Overview
Know-how protection prevents unauthorized reading of the converter settings.
To protect your converter settings against unauthorized copying, in addition to know-how
protection, you can also activate copy protection.
Requirement
Know-how protection requires a password.
Function description
The active know-how protection provides the following:
• With just a few exceptions, the values of all adjustable parameters p … are invisible.
– Several adjustable parameters can be read and changed when know-how protection is
active.
In addition, you can define an exception list of adjustable parameters, which end users
may change.
– Several adjustable parameters can be read but not changed when know-how protection
is active.
• The values of monitoring parameters r … remain visible.
• Locked functions:
– Downloading converter settings using a PC
– Automatic controller optimization
– Stationary or rotating measurement of the motor data identification
– Deleting the alarm history and the fault history
– Generating acceptance documents for safety functions
• Executable functions:
– Restoring factory settings
– Acknowledging faults
– Displaying faults, alarms, fault history, and alarm history
– Reading out the diagnostic buffer
– Controlling a converter using a PC
– Uploading adjustable parameters that can be changed or read when know-how
protection is active.
– Displaying acceptance documents for safety functions
When know-how protection is active, support can only be provided (from Technical Support)
after prior agreement from the machine manufacturer (OEM).
Parameter
Table 7-2 Parameters that can be changed with active know-how protection
Number Name
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection using LED / CU detect LED
p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Sav par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8402[0...8] RTC daylight saving time setting / RTC DST
p8805 Identification and Maintenance 4 Configuration / I&M 4 Config
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
p8980 EtherNet/IP profile / Eth/IP profile
p8981 EtherNet/IP ODVA STOP mode / Eth/IP ODVA STOP
p8982 EtherNet/IP ODVA speed scaling / Eth/IP ODVA n scal
p8983 EtherNet/IP ODVA torque scaling / Eth/IP ODVA M scal
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch
Table 7-3 Parameters that can be read with active know-how protection
Number Name
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
p0100 IEC/NEMA Standards / IEC/NEMA Standards
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select
p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0
Number Name
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / Inhibit PcCtrl
p0870 BI: Close main contactor / Close main cont
p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection / PZD telegr_sel
p1080[0...n] Minimum velocity / v_min
p1082[0...n] Maximum velocity / v_max
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current / I_ref
p2003 Reference torque / M_ref
p2006 Reference temperature / Ref temp
p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection / Fieldbus protocol
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PZD telegr ext
p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7765
p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list
p11026 Free tec_ctrl 0 unit selection / Ftec0 unit sel
p11126 Free tec_ctrl 1 unit selection / Ftec1 unit sel
p11226 Free tec_ctrl 2 unit selection / Ftec2 unit sel
Parameter
Requirements
• The converter has now been commissioned.
• You have generated the exception list for know-how protection.
• To guarantee know-how protection, you must ensure that the project does not remain at the
end user as a file.
Function description
Parameter
Further information
Overview
6HWSRLQWV 3RZHU
0RGXOH
6HWSRLQWSURFHV 0RWRUFRQWURO
0
VLQJ
7HFKQRORJ\ 3,'
FRQWUROOHU
&RQWURO8QLW
&RPPDQGV 'ULYHFRQWURO
6WDWXV
Drive control
The converter receives its commands from the higher-level control via the terminal strip or the
fieldbus interface of the Control Unit. The drive control defines how the converter responds to
the commands.
Sequence control when switching the motor on and off (Page 237)
Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip (Page 240)
Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs (Page 258)
Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET (Page 270)
Drive control via USS (Page 291)
Drive control via Modbus RTU (Page 294)
Drive control via Ethernet/IP (Page 297)
Drive control via BACnet MS/TP (Page 299)
Drive control via P1 (Page 302)
Jogging (Page 303)
The converter can switch between different settings of the drive control.
Switching over the drive control (command data set) (Page 305)
The free function blocks permit configurable signal processing within the converter.
Technology controller
3,' The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or flow.
The closed-loop motor control receives the setpoint either from the higher-level control or from
the technology controller.
PID technology controller (Page 332)
The converter has three additional technology controllers that operate independently of each
other.
Free technology controllers (Page 344)
The multi-zone control offers various procedures to process multiple setpoints or actual values
with only one technology controller.
Multi-zone control (Page 346)
The cascade control is ideal for applications in which, for example, significantly fluctuating
pressures or flow rates are equalized.
Cascade control (Page 349)
The "time switch", together with the real-time clock, offers the option of controlling when signals
are switched on and off.
Real time clock (RTC) (Page 353)
Time switch (DTC) (Page 355)
Motor control
The closed-loop motor control ensures that the motor follows the speed setpoint. You can
choose between various control modes.
Motor control (Page 356)
The converter provides several methods to brake the motor electrically. During electrical
braking, the motor develops a torque that reduces the speed down to standstill.
Electrically braking the motor (Page 370)
Energy saving
$
%
For standard induction motors, the efficiency optimization reduces the motor losses in the
& partial load range.
Efficiency optimization (Page 415)
The "Bypass" function switches the motor between converter and line operation.
Bypass (Page 418)
If the plant/system conditions permit, the converter switches off the motor temporarily.
Energy saving
Hibernation mode (Page 422)
If necessary, the main contactor control disconnects the converter from the power system and
so reduces the converter losses.
Line contactor control (Page 426)
The converter calculates how much energy controlled converter operation saves when
compared to mechanical flow control (e.g. throttle).
Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines (Page 428)
Overview
The brief parameter description provides the most important information for all of the
parameters that are assigned to a certain converter function.
If the number of parameter indices depends on the data sets, then the parameter index is shown
in an abbreviated form.
Overview
The sequence control defines the rules for switching the motor on and off.
5HDG\WRVZLWFKRQ
21 2))
2SHUDWLRQ
After switching the supply voltage on, the converter normally goes into the "ready to start" state.
In this state, the converter waits for the command to switch on the motor.
The converter switches on the motor with the ON command. The converter changes to the
"Operation" state.
After the OFF1 command, the converter brakes the motor down to standstill. The converter
switches off the motor once standstill has been reached. The converter is again "ready to start".
Function description
6ZLWFKRQWKHSRZHUVXSSO\RIWKHLQYHUWHU
6
6ZLWFKLQJRQLQKLELWHG
2))
DQGQRW 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 0RWRU 2))
DQGQRW 2)) VWDWLRQDU\
2)) 6
5HDG\IRUVZLWFKLQJRQ
21
2)) RU -RJJLQJ 2)) 6E
RU -RJJLQJ 4XLFNVWRS
6D 6F
,QKLELW (QDEOH 5DPSVWRS -RJJLQJGRZQUDPS
RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ
2)) 21 1HLWKHUMRJJLQJ -RJJLQJ
QRUMRJJLQJ RU -RJJLQJ
6
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 8-4 Sequence control of the converter when the motor is switched on and off
Converter states S1 … S5c are defined in the PROFIdrive profile. The sequence control defines the
transition from one state to another.
Parameters
Overview
In the converter, the input and output signals are interconnected with specific converter
functions using special parameters. The following parameters are available to interconnect
signals:
• Binectors BI and BO are parameters to interconnect binary signals.
• Connectors CI and CO are parameters to interconnect analog signals.
The following chapters describe how you adapt the function of individual converter inputs and
outputs using binectors and connectors.
%,S[[[[
', U
%,S[[[[
', U
%,S[[[[
', U
%,S[[[[
', U
%,S[[[[
', U
%,S[[[[
', U
S
'21& %2U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
S
'212 %2U\\[[Q
'2&20
S
'21& %2U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
, 8
$, &,S\\\\
U>@
$,
, 8
$, &,S\\\\
U>@
$,
, 7(03
$, &,S\\\\
˽
U>@
*1'
7(03
$, &,S\\\\
˽
U>@
*1'
S>@
$2 &2U[[\\
*1'
S>@
$2 &2U[[\\
*1'
%,S[[[[
; ', U
%,S[[[[
; ', U
%,S[[[[
; ', U
%,S[[[[
; ', U
; '2 U
; '21& U
; '2&20
When using the PM330 Power Module, in addition to the terminals on the Control Unit, the
converter has 4 digital inputs DI and 2 digital outputs DO on the Power Module.
Function description
%,S[[[[
', U
', U
', U
', U
', U
', U
; ', U
; ', U
; ', U
; ', U
1)
When using the PM330 Power Module, the converter has 4 additional digital inputs.
To change the function of a digital input, you must interconnect the status parameter of the
digital input with a binector input of your choice.
Binector inputs are designated in the parameter list with the "BI".
Example
S
', U
To acknowledge converter fault messages using digital input DI 1, you must interconnect DI 1
with the command to acknowledge faults (p2103).
Set p2103 = 722.1.
Parameter
For additional binector inputs and additional information on parameters, please refer to the
parameter list.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Function description
$,
$,
9RXW
9RXW , 8
*1' %,S[[[[
',
$, U
$,
',
$, U
$,
To use an analog input as additional digital input, you must interconnect the corresponding
status parameter r0722.11 or r0722.12 with a binector input of your choice.
You may operate the analog input as a digital input with 10 V or with 24 V.
NOTICE
Defective analog input due to overcurrent
If the analog input switch is set to "Current input" (I), a 10 V or 24 V voltage source results in an
overcurrent at the analog input. An overcurrent condition destroys the analog input.
• If you use an analog input as a digital input, then you must set the analog input switch to
"Voltage" (U).
Function description
S
'21& %2U\\[[Q
'212
'2&20
S
'212
'2&20
S
'21&
'212
'2&20
To change the function of a digital output, you must interconnect the digital output with a
binector output of your choice.
Binector outputs are designated in the parameter list with "BO".
1)
When using the PM330 Power Module, the converter has 2 additional digital outputs. The
function of the two additional digital outputs is fixed and cannot be modified:
• DO 0 (X9.8): Converter DC link is charged
• DO 1 (X9.11, X9.12): Close main contactor
Example
S
'2 U
To output converter fault messages via digital output DO 1, you must interconnect DO 1 with
these fault messages.
Set p0731 = 52.3
Parameter
Further information
You can invert the signal of the digital output using parameter p0748.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list and the function diagrams 2230 ff.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Function description
, 8 S>@
$, &,S\\\\
U>@
$,
, 8 S>@
$,
U>@
$,
, 7(03 S>@
˽ $,
U>@
*1'
7(03 S>@
˽ $,
U>@
*1'
The switch that belongs to the analog input is located behind the front doors of the Control Unit.
• The switches for AI 0 and AI 1 (current/voltage) are located behind the lower , 8
front door of the Control Unit.
$,
$,
7HPS,
door of the Control Unit. $,
For values outside the permissible measuring range, the converter outputs Alarm A03520
"Temperature sensor fault".
Example
S
$, U>@ >@
In order to enter the supplementary setpoint via analog input AI 0, you must interconnect AI 0
with the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Set p1075 = 755[0].
Parameter
Further information
Signal smoothing
When required, you can smooth the signal, which you read-in via an analog input, using
parameter p0753.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list and in function diagram 2251.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Function description
If you change the analog input type using p0756, then the converter automatically selects the
appropriate scaling of the analog input. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two
points (p0757, p0758) and (p0759, p0760). Parameters p0757 … p0760 are assigned to an
analog input via their index, e.g. parameters p0757[0] … p0760[0] belong to analog input 0.
S S
9ROWDJHLQSXW99 &XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$
\ \
S S
\ \
S S
[ [ 9 [ [ P$
S S S S
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example
The converter should convert a 6 mA … 12 mA signal into the value range ‑100% … 100% via
analog input 0. The wire-break monitoring of the converter should respond when 6 mA is fallen
below.
&XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$
\
S
[
S
[ P$
S
\
S
Procedure
1. Set the DIP switch for analog input 0 on the Control Unit to current input ("I").
, 8
2. set p0756[0] = 3
You have defined analog input 0 as a current input with wire-break monitoring.
3. Set p0757[0] = 6.0 (x1)
4. Set p0758[0] = -100.0 (y1)
5. Set p0759[0] = 12.0 (x2)
6. Set p0760[0] = 100.0 (y2)
7. Set p0761[0] = 6
An input current < 6 mA results in fault F03505.
The characteristic for the application example is set.
❒
Parameters
Function description
With the control enabled, electromagnetic interference on the signal cable can cause the motor
to slowly rotate in one direction, in spite of a speed setpoint = 0.
9P$ 9P$
'HDGEDQG 'HDGEDQG
The deadband acts on the zero crossover of the analog input characteristic. Internally, the
converter sets its speed setpoint = 0, even if the signal at the analog input terminals is slightly
positive or negative. This prevents the converter from rotating the motor when the speed
setpoint = 0.
Parameter
Function description
S>@
S>@
$2 &2U[[\\
*1'
S>@
S>@
$2
*1'
Example
S>@
$2 U
To output the converter output current via analog output 0, you must interconnect AO 0 with the
signal for the output current.
Set p0771 = 27.
Parameter
Function description
If you change the analog output type, then the converter automatically selects the appropriate
scaling of the analog output. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two points (p0777,
p0778) and (p0779, p0780).
S S
9ROWDJHRXWSXW99 &XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
9 P$
\ \
S S
\ \
S S
[ [ [ [
S S S S
Parameters p0777 … p0780 are assigned to an analog output via their index, e.g. parameters
p0777[0] … p0770[0] belong to analog output 0.
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example
Via analog output 0, the converter should convert a signal in the value range 0% … 100% into
an output signal 6 mA … 12 mA.
&XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
P$
\
S
\
S
[ [
S S
Procedure
1. Set p0776[0] = 2
This defines analog output 0 as a current output.
2. Set p0777[0] = 0.0 (x1)
3. Set p0778[0] = 6.0 (y1)
4. Set p0779[0] = 100.0 (x2)
5. Set p0780[0] = 12.0 (y2)
The characteristic for the application example is set.
❒
Parameters
Overview
6HOHFW672
672LVDFWLYH
The converter with active STO function prevents energy supply to the motor. The motor can no
longer generate torque on the motor shaft.
Consequently, the STO function prevents the starting of an electrically-driven machine
component.
Precondition
The machine manufacturer has already performed a risk assessment, e.g. in compliance with
EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery - Principles of risk assessment".
Function description
Safe Torque Off (STO) Standard converter functions linked with STO
1. The converter detects that STO has been selected ---
via the failsafe digital input.
2. The converter prevents the energy supply to the If you use a motor holding brake, the converter
motor. closes the motor holding brake.
If you use a line contactor, the converter opens
the line contactor.
6HOHFW672 6HOHFW672
W W
6SHHG 6SHHG
W W
672LVDFWLYH 672LVDFWLYH
W W
$ %
Figure 8-5 Functionality of STO when the motor is at standstill (A) and rotating (B)
(A): When selecting STO, if the motor is already stationary (zero speed), then STO prevents the
motor from starting.
(B): If the motor is still rotating (B) when STO is selected, it coasts down to standstill.
Example
The STO function is suitable for applications where the motor is already at a standstill or will
come to a standstill in a short, safe period of time through friction.
When STO is active, the converter can no longer electrically brake the motor, so that STO does
not shorten the time that it takes for machine components to coast down to zero speed.
More information
EN 60204‑1 defines "EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP" as actions taken in
an emergency. Further, it defines various stop categories for EMERGENCY STOP. "EMERGENCY
SWITCHING OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP" minimize different risks in the system or machine.
Table 8-8 The distinction between EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
Select STO
It is not necessary to switch off the
voltage to minimize risk.
Overview
The converter signals that the STO safety function is controlled to the higher-level control system
using two digital outputs.
Function description
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
S
'21& U
'212
'2&20
For converters equipped with PM240‑2 (FSD…FSG) and PM240P‑2 (FSD…FSF) Power Modules,
you must interconnect the "STO is active" feedback signals with two digital outputs of the
Control Unit.
Procedure
1. Set p0730 = 1838.3
2. Set p0731 = 1838.4
You have interconnected the feedback signal for safety function STO with the digital outputs of
the converter.
❒
Parameter
Overview
The converter offers various methods to start and stop the motor and reverse its direction.
Function description
212))
5HYHUVLQJ W
W
6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
Command "ON/OFF1" switches the motor on and off. The "Reversing" command inverts the
motor direction of rotation.
Examples
Table 8-10 Two-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs
Parameter Description
p3334 = 0 2/3 wire control selection
0: Two-wire control, ON/reverse
p0840[C] = 722.0 BI: ON/OFF (OFF1)
Command is received via digital input 0
p1113[C] = 722.1 BI: Setpoint inversion (reversing)
Command is received via digital input 1
Parameter Description
p0015 = 12 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: ON/OFF1
• Digital input 1: Reversing
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
Parameter
Function description
212))
&ORFNZLVH &RPPDQGKDVQRHIIHFW
212)) W
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
W
6723 6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
Examples
Table 8-13 Two-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs
Parameter Description
p3334 = 1 2/3 wire control selection
1: Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 1
Parameter Description
p0015 = 17 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation
• Digital input 1: ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
Parameter
Function description
212))
&ORFNZLVH
212)) W
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
W
6723 6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
Examples
Table 8-16 Two-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs
Parameter Description
p3334 = 2 2/3 wire control selection
2: Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0 (DI 0)
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 1 (DI 1)
Parameter Description
p0015 = 18 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation
• Digital input 1: ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
Parameter
Function description
(QDEOH2))
21 W
&ORFNZLVH
21 W
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
W
6723 6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
The "Enable" command is a precondition for switching on the motor. Commands "ON clockwise
rotation" and "ON counter-clockwise rotation" switch on the motor - and simultaneously select
a direction of rotation. Removing the enable switches the motor off (OFF1).
Examples
Table 8-19 Three-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs
Parameter Description
p3334 = 3 2/3 wire control selection
3: Three-wire control enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (enable/OFF1)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3332[C] = 722.2 BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 (ON counter-clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0
Parameter Description
p0015 = 19 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: Enable/OFF1
• Digital input 1: ON clockwise rotation
• Digital input 2: ON counter-clockwise rotation
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
Parameter
Function description
The "Enable" command is a precondition for switching on the motor. The "ON" command
switches the motor on. The "Reversing" command inverts the motor direction of rotation.
Removing the enable switches the motor off (OFF1).
(QDEOH2))
21 W
5HYHUVLQJ W
W
6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
Examples
Parameter Description
p3334 = 4 2/3 wire control selection
4: Three-wire control enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (enable/OFF1)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3332[C] = 722.2 BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 (reversing)
Command is received via digital input 0
Parameter Description
p0015 = 20 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: Enable/OFF1
• Digital input 1: ON
• Digital input 2: Reversing
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 118)
Parameter
Overview
5HFHLYHGDWD 6HQGGDWD
Converter and higher-level control system package their data in the form of telegrams.
)UDPH
8VHUGDWD
Figure 8-13 Telegram structure
8.7.2 Telegrams
Overview
The user data of the telegrams that are available are described in the following.
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3='
162//
67: 5HFHLYHXVHUGDWD
B$
=6: 1,67B$ 6HQGXVHUGDWD
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//B
67:
$
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B 3,67B 0(/'B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 */$77 1$085
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: 0B/,0 67:
B$
1,67B$ ,$,67B
=6: =6:
*/$77 */$77
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: )UHHO\DVVLJQDEOH
B$
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B :$51B )$8/7B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 &2'( &2'(
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3='
162//
67:
B$
3.:
1,67B$
=6:
*/$77
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: )UHHO\DVVLJQDEOH
B$
3.:
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B :$51B )$8/7B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 &2'( &2'(
16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7 with reading and writing to parameters
7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
67: 7HOHJUDPOHQJWKIRUWKHUHFHLYHGDWD
=6: 7HOHJUDPOHQJWKIRUWKHWUDQVPLWGDWD
Function description
11 Reserved
12 1 = torque control active Changes over the control mode p1501[0] = r2093.12
0 = speed control active for vector control.
13 1 = no external fault -- p2106[0] = r2093.13
0 = external fault is active (F07860)
14 Not used
15 1 = CDS bit 1 Changes over between settings p0811[0] = r2093.15
for different operation interfaces
(command data sets).
1)
If you switch from telegram 350 to a different one, then the converter sets all interconnections p1020,
… to "0". Exception: p2106 = 1.
Overview
The parameter channel allows parameter values to be cyclically read and written to.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(UGDQGWKZRUGV
$. 6 318 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3:( 3:(
3
0
Function description
AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number to
the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter channel
interface
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tempo‐
rary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal
for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)
No. Description
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter pre‐
vents a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within
the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)
Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.
PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor
Examples
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the parameter channel with the
following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYHREMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 8-14 Parameter channel for read request from p7841[2]
Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source, ON/
OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the parameter channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = Index 1)
Function description
AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
AK Description
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number to
the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter channel
interface
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927.)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tempo‐
rary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal
for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the conerter
prevents a parameter change)
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter pre‐
vents a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within
the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)
Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.
PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor
Examples
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the parameter
channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.
PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor
8.7.4 Examples
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the parameter
channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYHREMHFW ,QGH[
Figure 8-18 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]
Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source, ON/
OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must populate the telegram of the parameter
channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
Overview
When you have selected a telegram, the converter interconnects the corresponding signals with
the fieldbus interface. Generally, these interconnections are locked so that they cannot be
changed. However, with the appropriate setting in the converter, the telegram can be extended
or even freely interconnected.
Function description
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@
31R
S>@ U>@
31R 3='VHQGZRUG
6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUGRXEOHZRUG 6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUZRUG
6HQGZRUGYDOXHGRXEOHZRUG 6HQGZRUGYDOXHZRUG
Figure 8-21 Interconnection of the send data
In the converter, the send data are available in the "Word" format (p2051) - and in the "Double
word" format (p2061). If you set a specific telegram, or you change the telegram, the converter
automatically interconnects parameters p2051 and p2061 with the appropriate signals.
U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@
U>@
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
GRXEOHZRUG ZRUG ELWE\ELW
Figure 8-22 Interconnection of the receive data
Example
You wish to extend telegram 1 to 6 send words and 6 receive words. You want to test the
extension by initiating that the converter returns each receive word back to the higher-level
control system.
Procedure
1. p0922 = 999
2. p2079 = 1
3. p2051[2] = r2050[2]
4. …
5. p2051[5] = r2050[5]
6. Test the telegram length for received and sent words:
– r2067[0] = 6
– r2067[1] = 6
You wish to extend telegram 1 to 6 send words and 6 receive words.
❒
Parameter
Overview
"Direct data exchange" is sometimes called "slave-to-slave communication" or "data exchange
broadcast". With direct data exchange, slaves exchange data without any direct involvement of
the master.
Additional information
Further information about the "Direct data exchange" function is provided in the Fieldbus
function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Overview
The converter supports the writing and reading of parameters via acyclic communication:
• For PROFIBUS: Up to 240 bytes per write or read request via data set 47
• For PROFINET: Write or read requests via B02E hex and B02F hex
Example
Further information
Further information about acyclic communication is provided in the Fieldbus function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Overview
USS is used to transfer cyclic process data and acyclic parameter data between precisely one
master and up to 31 slaves. The converter is always the slave, and sends data when requested
to do so by the master. Slave-to-slave communication is not possible.
Function description
Parameter
Further information
Additional information about USS is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Overview
Modbus RTU is used to transfer cyclic process data and acyclic parameter data between precisely
one master and up to 247 slaves. The converter is always the slave, and sends data when
requested to do so by the master. Slave-to-slave communication is not possible.
Function description
Parameter
Further information
Additional information about Modbus RTU is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Overview
EtherNet/IP is an Ethernet-based fieldbus. EtherNet/IP is used to transfer cyclic process data as
well as acyclic parameter data.
Function description
Parameter Description
p2030 = 10 Fieldbus interface protocol selection: Ethernet/IP
p8924 PN DHCP mode 0: DHCP off
2: DHCP on, identification based on MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification based on Name of Station
p8925 PN interfaces configuration 0: No function
1: Reserved
2: Save the configuration and activate
3: Delete configuration
p8980 Ethernet/IP profile 0: SINAMICS
A change only becomes active after the converter power 1: ODVA AC/DC
supply is switched off and switched on again.
p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling
A change only becomes active after the converter power supply is switched off and
switched on again.
123: 32 127: 2 131: 0.125
124: 16 128: 1 132: 0.0625
125: 8 129: 0.5 133: 0.03125
126: 4 130: 0.25
Parameter
Further information
Additional information about USS is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Parameter Explanation
p2020 Fieldbus interface bau‐ 6: 9600 baud 8: 38400 baud
drate (Factory setting: 7: 19200 baud 10: 76800 baud
8)
p2021 Fieldbus interface address (Factory setting: 1)
Valid addresses: 0 … 127.
The parameter is only active if address 0 is set at the Control Unit address switch.
A change only becomes active after the converter power supply is switched off and switch‐
ed on again.
p2024 Fieldbus interface [0] maximum permissible processing time (APDU timeout)
times
p2025 Fieldbus SS BACnet set‐ [0] = device object instance number
tings [1] = info maximum number frames
[2] = APDU number of retries
[3] = maximum master address
p2026 Fieldbus interface BACnet COV increment
Change in value at which point the converter sends and UnConfirmedCOVNotification or
and ConfirmedCOVNotification.
r2029 Fieldbus interface er‐ [0] number of error-free tele‐ [4] number of parity errors
ror statistics grams [5] number of starting charac‐
[1] number of rejected tele‐ ter errors
grams [6] number of checksum errors
[2] number of framing errors [7] number of length errors
[3] number of overrun errors
p2030 = 5 Fieldbus interface protocol selection
p0015 = 110 sets p2013 = 5 → BACnet MS/TP
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time (Factory setting: 10 s)
p2040 = 0: Monitoring is deactivated
Further information
You can find additional information about BACnet MS/TP in the "Fieldbus" function manual:
Overview of the manuals (Page 573).
Settings for P1
Parameter Explanation
p2020 Fieldbus interface baudrate 5: 4800 baud
(Factory setting: 5) 6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
p2021 Fieldbus interface address (Factory setting: 99)
Valid addresses: 1 … 99.
The parameter is only active if address 0 is set at the Control Unit address switch.
A change only becomes active after the converter power supply is switched off and
switched on again.
p2024 Fieldbus interface times [0] Maximum permissible telegram processing time of
(Factory setting: [0] 1000 ms, the Modbus slave
[1] 0 ms, [2] 0 ms) [1] Character delay time
[2] Dead time between two telegrams
r2029 Fieldbus interface error sta‐ [0] number of error-free [4] number of parity errors
tistics telegrams [5] number of starting
[1] number of rejected character errors
telegrams [6] number of checksum
[2] number of framing er‐ errors
rors [7] number of length errors
[3] number of overrun er‐
rors
p2030 = 8 Fieldbus interface protocol selection: P1
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time (Factory setting: 100 ms)
p2040 = 0: Monitoring is deactivated
Further information
Additional information about P1 is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 573).
8.13 Jogging
Overview
The "Jog" function is typically used to temporarily move a motor using local control commands.
Requirement
The OFF1 command must be active. With an active ON command, the converter ignores the
commands "Jogging 1" and "Jogging 2".
Function description
5HDG\WRVZLWFKRQ
-RJJLQJ QRMRJJLQJ
2SHUDWLRQ
Commands "Jog 1" or "Jog 2" switch the motor on and off.
The commands are only active when the converter is in the "Ready for switching on" state.
-RJJLQJ
W
-RJJLQJ
W
0RWRUVSHHG
0D[LPXPVSHHG
S
6HWSRLQWMRJJLQJ
S
S S W
6HWSRLQWMRJJLQJ
S
Figure 8-23 Behavior of the motor when "jogging"
After switching on, the motor accelerates to the setpoint, jog 1 or setpoint, jog 2. The two
different setpoints can, for example, be assigned to motor clockwise and counter-clockwise
rotation.
When jogging, the same ramp-function generator is active as for the ON/OFF1 command.
Example
Parameter Description
p1055 = 722.0 Jogging bit 0: Select jogging 1 via digital input 0
p1056 = 722.1 Jogging bit 1: Select jogging 2 via digital input 1
Parameter
Overview
Several applications require the option of switching over the master control to operate the
converter.
Example: The motor is to be operable either from a central control via the fieldbus or via the local
digital inputs of the converter.
Function description
This means that you can set the converter control in var‐
ious ways and toggle between the settings. For instance,
as described above, the converter can either be operated
via a fieldbus or via its digital inputs.
&'6 The settings in the converter, which are assigned to a
specific master control, are called the command data set.
&'6
You select the command data set using parameter p0810. To do this, you must interconnect
parameter p0810 with a control command of your choice, e.g. a digital input.
Example
&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
'DWDIURP 3DUDPHWHULQGH[>@
WKH S>@
ILHOGEXV 212))
U
S>@
$FNQRZOHGJH
3=' U
3=' S>@
3=' &RQWUROE\
3=' U
3='
3/&
3=' S>@ 023ORZHU &'6
3='
3=' U
S &RQWUROOLQJ
6HOHFWFRPPDQGGDWDVHW
', U LQYHUWHU
&'6
IXQFWLRQV
&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
3DUDPHWHULQGH[>@
S>@
-RJ
', U
S>@
-RJ
', U
S>@
$FNQRZOHGJH
', U
&'6
Note
The converter requires approx. 4 ms to switch over the command data set.
Parameters
8.15.1 Overview
Overview
The free function blocks permit configurable signal processing in the converter.
Function description
The following free function blocks are available:
You can only use a function block once. The converter has 3 adders for instance, ADD 0, ADD 1,
and ADD 2. If you have already configured 3 adders, then no other adders are available.
Special features
The values for p0505 = 2 and for p0505 = 4 - represented in the converter - are identical.
However, the reference to SI or US units is required for internal calculations and to output
physical variables.
For variables, which cannot be represented as [%], then the following applies:
• p0505 = 1 corresponds to setting p0505 = 2
• p0505 = 3 corresponds to setting p0505 = 4
In the case of variables whose units are identical in the SI system and US system, and which can
be displayed as a percentage, the following applies:
• p0505 = 1 corresponds to setting p0505 = 3
• p0505 = 2 corresponds to setting p0505 = 4
Reference variables
There is a reference variable in the converter for most parameters with physical units. When the
referred representation [%] is set, then the converter scales the physical variables based on the
particular reference variable.
When the reference variable changes, then the significance of the scaled value also changes.
Example:
• Reference speed = 1500 rpm → fixed speed = 80 % corresponds to the speed = 1200 rpm
• Reference speed = 3000 rpm → fixed speed = 80 % corresponds to the speed = 2400 rpm
For each parameter you can find the associated reference variable for scaling in the parameter
list. Example: r0065 is scaled with reference variable p2000.
If scaling is not specified in the parameter list, then the converter always shows/displays the
parameter unscaled.
Groups of units
In the parameter list you will find the following information for parameters with changeable
units:
• Unit group
Designates the group to which the parameter belongs
• Unit selection
Designates the parameter that changes over the unit
Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505
The parameter belongs to the unit group 7_1 and p0505 changes over the unit.
Reference variable
p0596 defines the reference variable of the technological unit for the technology controller.
Unit group
Parameters involved with p0595 belong to unit group 9_1.
The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in p0595.
Special features
You must optimize the technology controller after changing p0595 or p0596.
Requirement
You are offline with Startdrive.
Procedure
1. In the project, select "Parameter".
2. Select "Units".
6. Go online.
The converter signals that offline, other units and process variables are set than in the
converter itself.
7. Accept these settings in the converter.
You have selected the motor standard and system of units.
❒
8.17 Setpoints
Overview
The converter receives its main setpoint from the setpoint source. The main setpoint generally
specifies the motor speed.
6HWSRLQWV 6HWSRLQWIURP
RSHUDWRUSDQHO
RU3&
0DLQVHWSRLQW
6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 6XSSOHPHQWD
U\VHWSRLQW
5DLVH
/RZHU 7HFKQRORJ\
FRQWUROOHU
3,'
-RJJLQJ
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV VHWSRLQW
,QYHUWHUFRQWURO
You have the following options when selecting the source of the main setpoint:
• Converter fieldbus interface
• Analog input of the converter
• Motorized potentiometer emulated in the converter
• Fixed setpoints saved in the converter
You have the same selection options when selecting the source of the supplementary setpoint.
Under the following conditions, the converter switches from the main setpoint to other
setpoints:
• When the technology controller is active and appropriately interconnected, its output
specifies the motor speed.
• When jogging is active
• When controlled from an operator panel or a PC
Function description
6FDOLQJ
S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
$, S
U>@
$,
$QDORJLQSXWDFWXDOYDOXH
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
In the quick commissioning, you define the preassignment for the converter interfaces.
Depending on what has been preassigned, after quick commissioning, the analog input can be
interconnected with the main setpoint.
Example
Setting with analog input 0 as setpoint source:
Parameter Description
p1070 = 755[0] Interconnects main setpoint with analog input 0
p1075 = 755[0] Interconnects supplementary setpoint with analog input 0
Parameters
Function description
6FDOLQJ
S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' S
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
In the quick commissioning, you define the preassignment for the converter interfaces.
Depending on what has been preassigned, after quick commissioning, the receive word PZD02
can be interconnected with the main setpoint.
Example
Setting with receive word PZD02 as setpoint source:
Parameter Description
p1070 = 2050[1] Interconnects the main setpoint with the receive word PZD02 from the fieldbus.
p1075 = 2050[1] Interconnects the supplementary setpoint with receive word PZD02 from the field‐
bus.
Parameters
Function description
The "Motorized potentiometer" function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer. The
output value of the motorized potentiometer can be set with the "higher" and "lower" control
signals.
S 6FDOLQJ
5DLVH S U
S 0DLQVHWSRLQW
/RZHU S
U
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
VHWSRLQWDIWHUWKHUDPS
IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
21
2))
W
023UDLVH
S
W
023ORZHU
S
W
6HWSRLQW
U
QPD[
S
W
S S
QPD[
Example
Setting with the motorized potentiometer as setpoint source:
Parameter Description
p1070 = 1050 Interconnects the main setpoint with the motorized potentiometer output.
Parameter
Function description
6HOHFWLRQ
6FDOLQJ
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
U
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
DFWLYH
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
S
6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
The converter makes a distinction between two methods when selecting the fixed speed
setpoints:
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S
Example
After it has been switched on, a conveyor belt only runs with two different velocities. The motor
should now operate with the following corresponding speeds:
• The signal at digital input 0 switches the motor on and accelerates it up to 300 rpm.
• The signal at digital input 1 accelerates the motor up to 2000 rpm.
• With signals at both digital inputs, the motor accelerates up to 2300 rpm.
Parameter Description
p1001[0] = Fixed speed setpoint 1
300.000
p1002[0] = Fixed speed setpoint 2
2000.000
p0840[0] = 722.0 ON/OFF1: Switches on the motor with digital input 0
p1070[0] = 1024 Main setpoint: Interconnects the main setpoint with a fixed speed setpoint.
p1020[0] = 722.0 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0: Interconnects fixed speed setpoint 1 with dig‐
ital input 0 (DI 0).
p1021[0] = 722.1 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1: Interconnects fixed speed setpoint 2 with dig‐
ital input 1 (DI 1).
p1016 = 1 Fixed speed setpoint mode: Directly selects fixed speed setpoints.
Table 8-44 Resulting fixed speed setpoints for the application example
Parameter
8.18.1 Overview
Overview
Setpoint processing influences the setpoint using the following functions:
• "Invert" inverts the motor direction of rotation.
• The "direction of rotation deactivate" function prevents the motor rotating in the incorrect
direction.
• The "Skip frequency bands" prevent the motor from being continuously operated within
these skip bands. This function avoids mechanical resonance effects by only permitting the
motor to operate briefly at specific speeds.
• The "Speed limitation" function protects the motor and the driven load against excessively
high speeds.
• The "Ramp-function generator" function prevents the setpoint from suddenly changing. As
a consequence, the motor accelerates and brakes with a reduced torque.
,QKLELWGLUHFWLRQ 6NLSIUHTXHQF\ 6SHHG 5DPSIXQFWLRQ
,QYHUW RIURWDWLRQ EDQGV OLPLWLQJ JHQHUDWRU
\ [
)URP 6HWSRLQWIRU
[ \ [ \ PRWRUFRQWURO
VHWSRLQW \
[
VRXUFH
W
Figure 8-32 Setpoint processing in the converter
Function description
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
The function inverts the sign of the setpoint using a binary signal.
Example
To invert the setpoint via an external signal, interconnect parameter p1113 with a binary signal
of your choice.
Parameter Description
p1113 = 722.1 Digital input 1 = 0: Setpoint remains unchanged.
Digital input 1 = 1: Converter inverts the setpoint.
p1113 = 2090.11 Inverts the setpoint via the fieldbus (control word 1, bit 11).
Parameter
Function description
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
S
In the factory setting of the converter, the negative direction of rotation of the motor is inhibited.
Set parameter p1110 = 0 to permanently enable the negative direction of rotation.
Set parameter p1111 = 1 to permanently inhibit the positive direction of rotation.
Parameter
Table 8-46 Application examples for inhibiting and enabling the direction of rotation
Overview
The converter has a minimum speed and four skip frequency bands:
• The minimum speed prevents continuous motor operation at speeds less than the minimum
speed.
• Each skip frequency band prevents continuous motor operation within a specific speed
range.
Function description
Minimum speed
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
\
0$;
0LQLPXP
VSHHG
[ \
[
Speeds where the absolute value is less than the minimum speed are only possible when the
motor is accelerating or braking.
Parameter
NOTICE
Incorrect direction of motor rotation if the parameterization is not suitable
If you are using an analog input as speed setpoint source, then for a setpoint = 0 V, noise
voltages can be superimposed on the analog input signal. After the on command, the motor
accelerates up to the minimum frequency in the direction of the random polarity of the noise
voltage. A motor rotating in the wrong direction can cause significant material damage to the
machine or system.
• Inhibit the motor direction of rotation that is not permissible.
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
S
0LQ
0D[LPXPVSHHG
S 0D[
The converter generates a message (fault or alarm) when the maximum speed is exceeded.
If you must limit the speed depending on the direction of rotation, then you can define speed
limits for each direction.
Parameters
\ [
[ \ [ \
[ \
W
[
[
\ W
0D[LPXP
[ VSHHG \
[
W
5DPSXSWLPH 5DPS
GRZQWLPH
(IIHFWLYHUDPSXS (IIHFWLYHUDPSGRZQ
WLPH WLPH
Initial and final rounding permit smooth, jerk-free acceleration and braking.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the motor are increased by the rounding times:
• Effective ramp-up time = p1120 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).
• Effective ramp-down time = p1121 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).
Parameter
Procedure
1. Enter the highest possible speed setpoint.
2. Switch on the motor.
3. Evaluate your drive response.
– If the motor accelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-up time.
An excessively short ramp-up time means that the motor will reach its current limiting
when accelerating, and will temporarily not be able to follow the speed setpoint. In this
case, the drive exceeds the set time.
– If the motor accelerates too fast, then extend the ramp-up time.
– Increase the initial rounding if the acceleration is jerky.
– In most applications, it is sufficient when the final rounding is set to the same value as the
initial rounding.
4. Switch off the motor.
Overview
3,' The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or flow.
3XPS
Requirement
The U/f control or the vector control have been set.
Function description
Function diagram
The technology controller is implemented as a PID controller (controller with proportional,
integral, and derivative action).
(QDEOH 2SHUDWLRQLVHQDEOHG
WKHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ
S
① The converter uses the start value when all the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
• The technology controller supplies the main setpoint (p2251 = 0).
• The ramp-function generator output of the technology controller has not yet reached the start value.
Figure 8-34 Simplified representation of the technology controller
Basic settings
The settings required as a minimum are marked in gray in the function diagram:
• Interconnect setpoint and actual values with signals of your choice
• Set ramp-function generator and controller parameters KP, TI and Td.
The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint with slight
oscillation.
• Increase the proportional component KP (p2280) and reduce
the rate time Td (p2274)
W
3. Set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator back to their original
value.
You have manually set the technology controller.
❒
Parameter
Further information
You will find additional information on the following PID controller components on the Internet
at:
• Setpoint input: Analog value or fixed setpoint
• Setpoint channel: Scaling, ramp-function generator and filter
• Actual value channel: Filter, limiting and signal processing
• PID controller: Principle of operation of the D component, inhibiting the I component and the
control sense
• Enable, limiting the controller output and fault response
FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/92556266)
Additional information for setting the technology controller in certain applications is provided
on the Internet:
• Closed-loop air intake control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
43296889)
• Closed-loop air discharge control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/77490904)
• Closed-loop fan control for a stairwell (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/77491576)
• Closed-loop fan control for a parking garage or a tunnel (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/77491575)
• Pressure-controlled pump (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
43297279)
• Level-controlled pump (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
43297280)
• Closed-loop control for the cooling circuit (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/43297284)
Overview
Autotuning is a converter function for the automatic optimization of the PID technology
controller.
Requirement
The following requirements apply:
• The motor closed-loop control is set
• The PID technology controller must be set the same as when used in subsequent operation:
– The actual value is interconnected.
– Scalings, filter and ramp-function generator have been set.
– The PID technology controller is enabled (p2200 = 1 signal).
Function description
For active autotuning, the converter interrupts the connection between the PID technology
controller and the speed controller. Instead of the PID technology controller output, the
autotuning function specifies the speed setpoint.
3,'DXWRWXQLQJ
6SHHG 0RWRUFRQWURO
)LOOLQJOHYHO
3,' VHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQW
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
$FWXDOYDOXH
3XPS
The speed setpoint results from the technology setpoint and a superimposed rectangular signal
with amplitude p2355. If actual value = technology setpoint ± p2355, the autotuning function
switches the polarity of the superimposed signal. This causes the converter to excite the process
variable for an oscillation.
$FWXDOYDOXH
W
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
)LOOLQJOHYHOVHWSRLQW S
S W
Figure 8-36 Example for speed setpoint and actual process value for autotuning
The converter calculates the parameters of the PID controller from the determined oscillation
frequency.
Executing autotuning
1. Select with p2350 the appropriate controller setting.
2. Switch on the motor.
The converter signals Alarm A07444.
3. Wait until alarm A07444 goes away.
The converter has recalculated parameters p2280, p2274 and p2285.
If the converter signals fault F07445:
– If possible, double p2354 and p2355.
– Repeat the autotuning with the changed parameters.
4. Back up the calculated values so that they are protected against power failure, e.g. using the
BOP‑2: OPTIONS → RAM‑ROM.
You have auto tuned the PID controller.
❒
Parameter
Overview
This function adapts the PID technology controller to the process, e.g. depending on the control
deviation of the technology controller.
Function description
6FDOLQJ
7,DGDSWDWLRQ
S S
S
S
S S
6FDOLQJ &RQILJXUDWLRQ
6FDOLQJ S S S
.3DGDSWDWLRQ
S S
S
S S .3 7,
3,FRPSRQHQWRIWKH
WHFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
Figure 8-37 Controller adaptation
Parameter
Overview
3,' The converter has three additional technology controllers.
The three "free technology controllers" have fewer setting options compared with the PID
technology controller described above.
PID technology controller (Page 332)
Function description
Example
An HVAC system with heating and cooling valves to process the air:
• The main controller controls the speed of the fan drive.
• The additional technology controllers control the cooling and heating via the two analog
outputs.
Parameters
See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
Overview
3,' Multi-zone control is used to control variables such as pressure or temperature via the
technology setpoint deviation.
Function description
Configuration
p31021 specifies the configuration of multi-zone control:
• 1 setpoint and 1, 2 or 3 actual values
• Maximum value control (cooling)
The maximum value control compares 2 pairs of setpoint and actual value.
The converter controls the setpoint / actual value pair for which the actual value is greater
than the associated setpoint.
If both actual values are greater than the associated setpoints, the converter controls the
setpoint / actual value pair with the greater deviation. The converter only switches over to the
other setpoint / actual value pair if the deviation of the controlled setpoint / actual value pair
is more than two percent lower than the deviation of the uncontrolled value pair.
The control pauses if both actual values lie below the associated setpoints.
• Minimum valve control (heating)
The minimum value control compares 2 pairs of setpoint and actual value.
The converter controls the setpoint / actual value pair for which the actual value is less than
the associated setpoint.
If both actual values are smaller than the associated setpoints, the converter controls the
setpoint / actual value pair with the greater deviation. The converter only switches over to the
other setpoint / actual value pair if the deviation of the controlled setpoint / actual value pair
is more than two percent lower than the deviation of the uncontrolled value pair.
The control pauses if both actual values lie above the associated setpoints.
p31020 = 0 deactivates the multi-zone control and resets the interconnection of the analog
inputs to the factory setting:
p31023[0] = 0
p31023[2] = 0
p31026[0] = 0
p31026[1] = 0
p2253 = 0
p2264 = 0
Example
In an open plan office, temperature sensors (Lg-Ni1000) are installed in three different places.
The converter receives the measured values and temperature setpoint via its analog inputs.
Temperature setpoints between 8 °C … 30 °C are permissible. Overnight, the average
temperature should be 16° C.
Parameter Description
p2200[0] = 1 Technology controller enable
p2900[0] = 16 Temperature setpoint overnight as a fixed percentage value
p31020 = 1 Activate multi-zone control
p31021 = 0 Multi-zone control with one setpoint and three actual values
p31022 = 7 Three actual values, one setpoint. The actual value of the closed-loop control is the
average value of three actual values.
p31023[0] = 755[0] Temperature setpoint via analog input AI 0
p0756[0] = 0 Select analog input type (voltage input 0 … 10 V)
p0757[0] = 0 Lower value = 8° C (0 V ≙ 8° C)
p0758[0] = 8
p0759[0] = 10 Upper value = 30° C (10 V ≙ 30° C)
p0760[0] = 30
p31023[1] = 2900 Interconnect p31023[1] with the value from p2900 for the reduction overnight
p31026[0]= 755.2 Temperature actual value 1 via analog input 2 as a percentage value
p0756[2] = 6 Analog input type (temperature sensor LG-Ni1000)
p0757[2] = 0 Lower value of the scaling characteristic
p0758[2] = 0
p31023[1] = 2900 Interconnect p31023[1] with the value from p2900 for the reduction overnight
p31026[0]= 755.2 Temperature actual value 1 via analog input 2 as a percentage value
p0756[2] = 6 Analog input type (temperature sensor LG-Ni1000)
p0757[2] = 0 Lower value of the scaling characteristic
p0758[2] = 0
p0759[2] = 100 Upper value of the scaling characteristic
p0760[2] = 100
p31026[1] = 755[3] Temperature actual value 2 via analog input AI 3 in %
p0756[3] = 6 Select analog input type (temperature sensor LG-Ni1000)
p0757[3] = 0 Lower value of the scaling characteristic
p0758[3] = 0
Parameter Description
p0759[3] = 100 Upper value of the scaling characteristic
p0760[3] = 100
p31026[2] = 755[1] Temperature actual value 3 via a temperature sensor with current output
(0 mA … 20 mA) via analog input AI 1
p0756[1] = 2 Analog input type (current input 0 … 20 mA)
p0757[1] = 0 Lower value of the scaling characteristic (0 mA ≙ 0 °C)
p0758[1] = 0
p0759[1] = 20 Upper value of the scaling characteristic (20 mA ≙ 100%)
p0760[1] = 100
p31025 = 722.4 Switch over from day to night via digital input 4
Parameters
You will find more information about this multi-zone control in the parameter list and in function
diagram 7032 of the List Manual.
Overview
3,' The cascade control is ideal for applications in which, for example, significantly fluctuating
pressures or flow rates are equalized.
$, %
$,
9287
'21&
'212 S
'2&20 U
'212 S
'2&20 U
'21&
'212 S
'2&20 U
MD Speed-controlled motor
M1 … M3 Uncontrolled motors
B0 Pressure sensor. Interconnect the signal of the pressure sensor with the actual value input
of the technology controller.
Figure 8-39 Example: Cascade control for the pressure in a liquid pipe
Depending on the control deviation of the technology controller, the converter cascade control
switches a maximum of three additional motors directly to the line supply via contactors.
Precondition
To deploy the cascade control, you must activate the technology controller.
Function description
0RWRU0'VSHHG S
S
S
S෪
S
S W
&RQWUROGHYLDWLRQ
S
S
S W
0RWRU0QLVFRQQHFWHG
UQ
UQ
S W
0RWRU0'VSHHG S
S
S
S෪
S
S W
&RQWUROGHYLDWLRQ
S W
S
S
0RWRU0QLVFRQQHFWHG
UQ
UQ
S W
Table 8-57 p2371 specifies the sequence for activating and deactivating the motors
Parameter
Additional information is provided in the parameter list and in function diagram 7036.
Further information
Example:
Saved as alarm time in the alarm buffer:
r2123[0] = 2345 [ms]
r2145[0] = 14580 [days]
Number of seconds = 2345 / 1000 + 14580 × 86400 = 1259712002
Converting this number of seconds to RTC provides the date: 02.12.2009, 01:00:02.
The times specified for alarms and faults always refer to standard time.
Parameters
Examples:
• Switching temperature control from day to night mode.
• Switching a process control from weekday to weekend.
6LJQDODWWKHRXWSXW
W
Figure 8-42 Example of the response of the time switch.
Overview
The converter has two alternative methods to ensure the motor speed follows the configured
speed setpoint:
• U/f control
• Vector control
Overview
Components between the converter and the motor influence the closed-loop control quality of
the converter:
• Output reactor or sine-wave filter
In the factory setting, for the motor data identification, the converter assumes that neither
output reactor nor sine wave filter are connected at the converter output.
• Motor cable with unusually high cable resistance.
For the motor data identification, the converter assumes a cable resistance = 20 % of the
stator resistance of the cold motor.
Function description
You must correctly set the components between the converter and motor to achieve an
optimum closed-loop control quality
Procedure
1. Set p0010 = 2.
2. Set the cable resistance in p0352.
3. Set p0230 to the appropriate value.
4. Set p0235 to the appropriate value.
5. Set p0010 = 0.
6. Carry out the quick commissioning and the motor identification again.
Commissioning (Page 157)
You have set the reactor, filter and cable resistance between the converter and motor.
❒
Parameter
Overview
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QൺI
U U
6RIWVWDUW
0 8
IVHW 8VHW 2XWSXWYROWDJH
Q I U
6OLSFRPSHQVD ,
TBVHW
9IFKDUDFWHUL
WLRQ VWLF
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW,TBVHW 9ROWDJHERRVW
U
1)
In the "Flux Current Control (FCC)" U/f version, the converter controls the motor current (starting
current) at low speeds.
Figure 8-43 Simplified function diagram of the U/f control
The U/f control is a speed feedforward control with the following properties:
• The converter sets the output voltage on the basis of the U/f characteristic.
• The output frequency is essentially calculated from the speed setpoint and the number of
pole pairs of the motor.
• The slip compensation corrects the output frequency depending on the load and thus
increases the speed accuracy.
• The omission of a control loop means that the U/f control is stable in all cases.
• In applications with higher speed accuracy requirements, a load-dependent voltage boost
can be selected (flux current control, FCC)
For operation of the motor with U/f control, you must set at least the following subfunctions
appropriate for your application:
• U/f characteristic
• Voltage boost
Function description
The converter has different U/f characteristics.
0D[LPXPRXWSXW /LQHDU
YROWDJH
U
S
5DWHGPRWRUIUHTXHQF\
(&2
PRGH 6HOHFWLRQRIWKH
FKDUDFWHULVWLF
)&& S
U
2
,TBVHW
IVHW 8VHW
1
S
3DUDEROLF
U
1
S
With increasing speed or output frequency, the converter increases its output voltage U. The
maximum possible output voltage of the converter depends on the line voltage.
The converter can increase the output frequency even at the maximum output voltage. The
motor is then operated with field weakening.
The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency also depends on the following
variables:
The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency p0310 also depends on the
following variables:
• Ratio between the converter size and the motor size
• Line voltage
• Line impedance
• Actual motor torque
The maximum possible output voltage as a function of the input voltage is provided in the
technical data.
Parameters
Overview
After selection of the U/f characteristic, no further settings are required in most applications.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
• Load moment of inertia too high
• Load torque too large
• Ramp-up time p1120 too short
To improve the starting behavior of the motor, a voltage boost can be set for the U/f characteristic
at low speeds.
Requirement
The ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator is, depending on the motor rated power, 1 s
(< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).
Function description
8
0D[LPXPRXWSXW
YROWDJH
U
S
S
S
S I
5DWHGPRWRU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 8-45 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example
Increase parameter values p1310 … p1312 in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in p1310 ...
p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the converter due to overcurrent.
If message A07409 appears, it is not permissible that you further increase the value of any of the
parameters.
Procedure
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage boost
p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum speed with maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in order
to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
❒
Parameter
Overview
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QൺI
U U
0 8
IVHW 8VHW 2XWSXWYROWDJH
Q I U
6OLSFRPSHQVD ,TBVHW 8IFKDUDFWHUL
WLRQ VWLF
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW,TBVHW 9ROWDJHERRVW
U
Figure 8-46 Default setting of the U/f control after selecting Standard Drive Control
Selecting application class Standard Drive Control in the quick commissioning adapts the
structure and the setting options of the U/f control as follows:
• Starting current closed-loop control: At low speeds, a controlled motor current reduces the
tendency of the motor to oscillate.
• With increasing speed, the converter changes from closed-loop starting current control to U/
f control with load-dependent voltage boost.
• The slip compensation is activated.
• Soft starting is not possible.
• Reduced setting options
Function description
0D[LPXPRXWSXW /LQHDU
YROWDJH
U
IVHW
7HFKQRORJLFDODSSOLFDWLRQ
,TBVHW
S S
5DWHGPRWRUIUHTXHQF\
8VHW
3DUDEROLF
U
IVHW
,TBVHW
S
① The closed-loop starting current control optimizes the speed control at low speeds
② The converter compensates the voltage drop across the motor stator resistance
Figure 8-47 Characteristics after selecting Standard Drive Control
The application class Standard Drive Control reduces the number of characteristics and setting
options:
• A linear and a parabolic characteristic are available.
• Selecting a technological application defines the characteristics.
Parameter
Overview
After selecting application class Standard Drive Control, in most applications no additional
settings need to be made.
At standstill, the converter ensures that at least the rated motor magnetizing current flows.
Magnetizing current p0320 approximately corresponds to the no-load current at 50 % … 80 %
of the rated motor speed.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
• Load moment of inertia too high
• Load torque too large
• Ramp-up time p1120 too short
The current can be increased at low speeds to improve the starting behavior of the motor.
Requirement
The ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator is, depending on the motor rated power, 1 s
(< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).
Function description
Starting current (boost) after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control
8
0D[LPXPRXWSXW
YROWDJH
U
S
S
S
S
S I
5DWHGPRWRU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 8-48 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example
The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 … p1312.
Increase parameter values p1310 … p1312 in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in p1310 ...
p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the converter due to overcurrent.
If message A07409 appears, it is not permissible that you further increase the value of any of the
parameters.
Procedure
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage boost
p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor with the maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in order
to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
❒
Parameter
Overview
The vector control comprises closed-loop current control and a higher-level closed-loop speed
control.
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
0D[LPXPVSHHG
&DOFXODWHDFFHOHUD 6OLS
S 0HDVXUHG
WLRQWRUTXH 7RUTXH YROWDJH
&DOFXODWH SUHFRQWURO 0RWRUDQGFXUUHQWPRGHO
VSHHGOLPLWV
0HDVXUHG
7UDQVIRU FXUUHQW
7, PDWLRQ
.3 7RUTXH 2XWSXWYROWDJH
6SHHGVHWSRLQW VHWSRLQW
7UDQVIRU
PDWLRQ
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
,TFRQWUROOHU 9ROWDJHDQJOH
&DOFXODWHGVSHHG
DFWXDOYDOXH
&XUUHQWOLPLW
S )OX[VHWSRLQW ,GFRQWUROOHU
Using the motor model, the converter calculates the following closed-loop control signals from
the measured phase currents and the output voltage:
• Current component Iq
• Current component Iq
• Speed actual value
The setpoint of the current component Id (flux setpoint) is obtained from the motor data. For
speeds above the rated speed, the converter reduces the flux setpoint along the field weakening
characteristic.
When the speed setpoint is increased, the speed controller responds with a higher setpoint for
current component Iq (torque setpoint). The closed-loop control responds to a higher torque
setpoint by adding a higher slip frequency to the output frequency. The higher output frequency
also results in a higher motor slip, which is proportional to the accelerating torque. Iq and
Idcontrollers keep the motor flux constant using the output voltage, and adjust the matching
current component Iq in the motor.
Default settings after selecting the application class Dynamic Drive Control
Selecting application class Dynamic Drive Control adapts the structure of the vector control and
reduces the setting options:
If the motor exhibits the following response, the speed control is well set and you do not have
to adapt the speed controller manually:
The speed setpoint (broken line) increases with the set ramp-up
time and rounding.
The speed actual value follows the setpoint without any over‐
shoot.
W
Initially, the speed actual value follows the speed setpoint with
some delay, and then overshoots the speed setpoint.
First, the actual speed value increases faster than the speed
setpoint. Before the setpoint reaches its final value, it passes the
actual value. Finally, the actual value approaches the setpoint
without any significant overshoot.
W
In the two cases describe above, we recommend that you manually optimize the speed control.
Requirements
• Torque precontrol is active: p1496 = 100 %.
• The load moment of inertia is constant and independent of the speed.
• The converter requires 10 % … 50 % of the rated torque to accelerate.
When necessary, adapt the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator
(p1120 and p1121).
Procedure
1. Switch on the motor.
2. Enter a speed setpoint of approximately 40 % of the rated speed.
3. Wait until the actual speed has stabilized.
4. Increase the setpoint up to a maximum of 60% of the rated speed.
5. Monitor the associated characteristic of the setpoint and actual speed.
6. Optimize the controller by adapting the ratio of the moments of inertia of the load and motor
(p0342):
Initially, the speed actual value follows the speed setpoint with
some delay, and then overshoots the speed setpoint.
• Increase p0342
Initially, the speed actual value increases faster than the speed
setpoint. The setpoint passes the actual value before reaching its
final value. Finally, the actual value approaches the setpoint with‐
out any overshoot.
W • Reduce p0342
Parameters
Overview
DC braking
DC braking prevents the motor from transferring the braking en‐
ergy to the converter. The converter impresses a DC current into
the motor, which brakes the motor. The motor converts the brak‐
ing energy E of the load into heat.
• Advantage: The motor brakes the load without the converter Q
having to process regenerative power.
• Disadvantages: significant increase in the motor temperature;
no defined braking characteristics; no constant braking torque; Q
no braking torque at standstill; braking energy E is lost as heat;
does not function when the power fails ( ˭-Q
Compound braking W
Dynamic braking
Using a braking resistor, the converter converts the electrical en‐
ergy into heat.
• Advantages: defined braking response; motor temperature
does not increase any further; constant braking torque
• Disadvantages: Braking resistor required; braking energy E is Q
lost in the form of heat
( ˭-Q
W
8.26.2 DC braking
Overview
DC braking is used for applications where the motor must be actively braked, but where the
converter is neither capable of energy recovery nor does it have a braking resistor.
Typical applications for DC braking include:
• Centrifuges
• Saws
• Grinding machines
• Conveyor belts
DC braking is not permissible in applications involving suspended loads, e.g. lifting equipment/
cranes and vertical conveyors.
Requirement
The DC braking function is possible only for induction motors.
NOTICE
Motor overheating as a result of DC braking
The motor will overheat if you use DC braking too frequently or use it for too long. This may
damage the motor.
• Monitor the motor temperature.
• Allow the motor to adequately cool down between braking operations.
• If necessary, select another motor braking method.
Function description
With DC braking, a constant braking current flows through the motor. As long as the motor is
rotating, the DC current generates a braking torque.
The following configurations are available for DC braking:
• DC braking initiated by a control command
• DC braking when falling below a starting speed
• DC braking when the motor is switched off
Regardless of the configuration, you also can define the DC braking as a reaction to certain
converter faults.
WARNING
Unexpected motor acceleration
In the following configurations, the converter can accelerate the motor to the set speed
without requiring a further ON command:
- DC braking initiated by a control command
- DC braking when falling below a starting speed
An unexpected acceleration of the motor can cause serious injury or material damage.
• Consider the behavior of the drive in the higher-level controller.
S
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYDWLRQ
W
Q 'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
PRWRU
W
S
U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-50 Activating DC braking via a control command
S
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYDWLRQ
W
Q
'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
S PRWRU
6SHHGDWWKHVWDUWRI'&
EUDNLQJ
W
S
S '&EUDNLQJGXUDWLRQ
U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-51 DC braking when falling below a starting speed
2))RU2)) W
Q 2))RU2))
'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
S
PRWRU
6SHHGDWWKHVWDUWRI'&
EUDNLQJ
W
S
S '&EUDNLQJGXUDWLRQ
U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-52 DC braking when the motor is switched off
Set p1231 = 5.
)DXOW
W
Q 2))
'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
S
PRWRU
6SHHGDWWKHVWDUWRI'&
EUDNLQJ
W
S
S '&EUDNLQJGXUDWLRQ
U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-53 DC braking as a fault reaction
Parameter
Overview
Compound braking is suitable for applications in which the motor is normally operated at a
constant speed and is only braked down to standstill in longer time intervals.
Typically, the following applications are suitable for compound braking:
• Centrifuges
• Saws
• Grinding machines
• Horizontal conveyors
Compound braking is not permissible for applications with suspended loads, e.g. lifting
equipment/cranes all vertical conveyors.
Function description
:LWKRXWFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ :LWKFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
6SHHG
W W $GGLWLYH'&
0RWRUFXUUHQW
W W
'&OLQNYROWDJH
U
W W
Figure 8-54 Motor brakes with and without active compound braking
Compound braking prevents the DC-link voltage increasing above a critical value. The converter
activates compound braking depending on the DC-link voltage. Above a DC-link voltage
threshold (r1282), the converter adds a DC current to the motor current. The DC current brakes
the motor and prevents an excessive increase in the DC-link voltage.
Note
Compound braking is possible only with the U/f control.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
• The "flying restart" function is active
• DC braking is active
• Vector control is selected
NOTICE
Overheating of the motor due to compound braking
The motor will overheat if you use compound braking too frequently or for too long. This may
damage the motor.
• Monitor the motor temperature.
• Allow the motor to adequately cool down between braking operations.
• If necessary, select another motor braking method.
Parameter
Overview
Dynamic braking processes the regenerative power that occurs during braking of the motor. In
this way, the converter can accelerate and brake the motor with the same dynamic response.
The following are typical applications for dynamic braking:
• Centrifuge
• Horizontal conveyors
• Vertical and inclined conveyors
• Hoisting gear
Requirement
You are using a PM240-2 power module and a braking resistor.
Function description
6SHHG
U
W
'&OLQNYROWDJHU
0D[LPXP'&OLQNYROWDJHU
$FWLYDWLRQWKUHVKROGIRUWKHEUDNLQJ
PRGXOH
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRUEUDNLQJSRZHU W
W
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
Q Q
/RDGDFFHOHUDWLQJ0RWRUL]HGRSHUDWLRQ
Q Q
/RDGEUDNLQJ*HQHUDWLQJRSHUDWLRQ
The motor supplies regenerative power to the converter when braking. The regenerative power
means that the DC-link voltage in the converter increases. Above the activation threshold for the
braking module, the converter forwards the regenerative power to the braking resistor. The
braking resistor converts the regenerative power into heat, thereby preventing converter faults
due to excessive DC-link voltage.
Factory setting for the activation threshold for the braking module:
• 690 V converter: 1120 V
• 400 V converters: 760 V
• 200 V converter: 385 V
NOTICE
Overload of motor insulation during braking
When the motor brakes, the DC-link voltage, and thus also the voltage load of the motor,
increases. Particularly when you operate a 500 V motor on a 690 V converter, the converter can
overload the motor insulation and damage the motor.
• Reduce the activation threshold for the braking module
Procedure
1. Setting the braking power
Using p0219, you define the maximum braking power that the braking resistor must absorb.
3
3PD[
S
Example
You can find an example for configuring and commissioning a drive with braking resistor on the
Internet:
Engineering and commissioning series lifting equipment/cranes (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/103156155)
Parameters
Further information
Interaction with other functions
When you set the braking power of the braking resistor (p0219 > 0), the converter disables the
Vdc_max control.
Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage (Page 393)
At the same time, p0219 defines the regenerative power limit p1531 for vector control.
Sensorless vector control (Page 366)
Overview
The typical applications for braking with energy recovery (regenerative feedback into the line
supply) are as follows:
• Hoist drives
• Centrifuges
• Unwinders
For these applications, the motor must brake for longer periods of time.
The converter can feed back up to 100% of its rated power into the line supply (referred to "High
Overload" base load).
Technical data, PM250 Power Module (Page 547)
Parameter
Overview
The U/f control prevents too high a motor current by influencing the output frequency and the
motor voltage (I-max controller).
Requirement
You have selected U/f control.
The application must allow the motor torque to decrease at a lower speed.
Function description
The I-max controller influences the output frequency and the motor voltage.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during acceleration, the I-max controller extends
the acceleration operation.
If the motor load is so high during steady-state operation that the motor current reaches the
current limit, then the I-max controller reduces the speed and the motor voltage until the motor
current returns to the permissible range again.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during deceleration, the I-max controller extends
the deceleration operation.
Parameter
Overview
The converter temperature is essentially defined by the following effects:
• The ambient temperature
• The ohmic losses increasing with the output current
• Switching losses increasing with the pulse frequency
Monitoring types
The converter monitors its temperature using the following monitoring types:
• I2t monitoring (alarm A07805, fault F30005)
• Measuring the chip temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05006, fault F30024)
• Measuring the heat sink temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05000, fault F30004)
Function description
%DVHORDGRXWSXWFXUUHQWIRUD
WHPSRUDULO\UHGXFHGSXOVHIUHTXHQF\
S 3XOVHIUHTXHQF\
Figure 8-57 Derating characteristic and base load output current for overload
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of thermal overload
cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the converter reduces its output current.
– In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current
or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off
the motor with fault F30024.
Parameters
Overview
The converter can evaluate one of the following sensors to protect the motor against
overtemperature:
Function description
KTY84 sensor
NOTICE
Overheating of the motor due to KTY sensor connected with the incorrect polarity
If a KTY sensor is connected with incorrect polarity, the motor can be damaged by overheating,
as the converter cannot detect a motor overtemperature condition.
• Connect the KTY sensor with the correct polarity.
Using a KTY sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature and the sensor itself for wire-
break or short-circuit:
• Temperature monitoring:
The converter uses a KTY sensor to evaluate the motor temperature in the range from
-48 °C ... +248 °C.
Set the temperature for the alarm and fault thresholds with parameter p0604 or p0605.
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
• Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 50 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
Temperature switch
The converter interprets a resistance ≥ 100 Ω as an opened bimetallic switch and responds
according to the setting for p0610.
PTC sensor
˽ The converter interprets a resistance > 1650 Ω as being an overtemperature condition and
responds according to the setting of p0610.
The converter interprets a resistance < 20 Ω as being a short-circuit and responds with alarm
A07015. If the alarm is present for longer than 100 milliseconds, the converter shuts down with
fault F07016.
Pt1000 sensor
˽ Using a Pt1000 sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature and the sensor itself for
wire breakage and/or short-circuit:
• Temperature monitoring:
Using a Pt1000 sensor, the converter evaluates the motor temperature in the range from
-48 °C ... +248 °C.
Set the temperature for the alarm and fault thresholds with parameter p0604 or p0605.
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
• Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 603 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
Parameters
Overview
The converter calculates the motor temperature based on a thermal motor model. After
commissioning, the converter sets the thermal motor type to match the motor.
The thermal motor model responds far faster to temperature increases than a temperature
sensor.
If the thermal motor model is used together with a temperature sensor, e.g. a Pt1000, then the
converter corrects the model according to the measured temperature.
Function description
˽ U
Parameter
˽
U U
L
˽U
$
Q U
)
W
Figure 8-59 Thermal motor model 1 for reluctance motors
Parameters
Overview
The thermal motor model of the converter fulfills motor overload protection according to IEC/
UL 61800‑5‑1.
For motor overload protection according to IEC/UL 61800‑5‑1, some parameters of the thermal
motor model may also need to be adjusted.
Requirement
You have correctly entered the motor data during quick commissioning.
NOTICE
Thermal overload of third-party motors due to a trip threshold that is too high
With a Siemens motor, the converter sets the trip threshold of the thermal motor model to
match the motor. With a third-party motor, the converter cannot ensure in every case that the
trip threshold is exactly right for the motor. A trip threshold that is set too high can lead to a
thermal overload, thus causing damage to the motor.
• If required for a third-party motor, reduce the corresponding trip threshold p0605, p0615,
or p5391.
Procedure
1. Set p0610 = 12.
2. Set the following parameters depending on the motor:
– Induction motor:
p0612.1 = 1
p0612.9 = 1
For a motor without temperature sensor: p0625 = 40 °C
– Synchronous motor
p0612.0 = 1
p0612.8 = 1
For a motor without temperature sensor: p0613 = 40 °C
The trip threshold p0605, p0615 or p5391 parameterized in the motor data set may not be
increased.
Changing additional parameters of the thermal motor model can lead to the converter no longer
satisfying the motor overload protection in accordance with IEC/UL 61800‑5‑1.
Overview
An electric motor converts electrical energy into mechanical energy to drive the load. If the
motor is driven by its load, e.g. by the inertia of the load during braking, the energy flow
reverses: The motor operates temporarily as a generator, and converts mechanical energy into
electrical energy. The electrical energy flows from the motor to the converter. The converter
stores the energy in its DC-link capacitors. As a consequence, the DC link voltage Vdc in the
converter is higher.
An excessively high DC link voltage damages both the converter and the motor. The converter
therefore monitors its DC-link voltage and, when necessary, switches off the connected motor
and outputs the fault "DC-link overvoltage".
Requirement
The Vdc_max control can be used only with the PM230, PM240‑2, PM240P‑2 and PM330 Power
Modules.
You must deactivate the Vdc_max control if you are using a braking resistor.
PM250 Power Modules feed back regenerative energy into the line supply. Deactivate Vdc_max
control for PM250 Power Modules.
Function description
6SHHG
U
'&OLQNYROWDJHU
9GFBPD[
6ZLWFKLQOHYHO9GFBPD[
FRQWUROOHU
W
9GFBPD[FRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
Q Q Q
The Vdc_max control lengthens the motor ramp-down time when braking. Consequently, the
motor feeds only so much energy back into the converter to cover the losses in the converter. The
DC link voltage remains within the permissible range.
Electrical braking (Page 370)
Parameter
The parameters differ depending on the motor control mode.
The no-load monitoring evaluates the motor current. An insufficient current can
mean that the motor cable is disconnected.
The blocking protection triggers for a motor current that corresponds to the set
current limit coupled with motor standstill.
The torque monitoring assumes that a specific torque is associated with each speed
for pumps and fans. Insufficient torque indicates that the motor and the load are no
longer mechanically connected.
An excessive torque can indicate problems in the mechanical system of the driven
load, e.g. a mechanically blocked load.
Blocking protection, leakage protection and dry-running protection are a monitor‐
ing method for pumps or fans. The monitoring combines a torque monitoring with
a blocking protection.
The speed monitoring evaluates a periodic binary signal. A signal failure indicates
that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected with each other.
Function description
0 If the load of a standard induction motor exceeds the stall torque of the motor, the motor can
also stall during operation on the converter. A stalled motor is stationary and does not develop
Q sufficient torque to accelerate the load.
If the "Motor model fault signal stall detection" r1746 for the time p2178 is present via the
"Motor model error threshold stall detection" p1745, the converter signals "Motor stalled" and
fault F07902.
Parameter
See also
Blocking protection (Page 397)
Function description
An insufficient motor current indicates that the motor cable is disconnected.
If the motor current for the time p2180 lies below the current level p2179, the converter signals
the alarm A07929.
Parameters
Function description
If the mechanical load is too high, the motor may block. For a blocked motor, the motor current
corresponds to the set current limit without the speed reaching the specified setpoint.
If the speed lies below the speed threshold p2175 for the time p2177 while the motor current
reaches the current limit, the converter signals "Motor blocked" and fault F07900.
Parameter
Function description
In applications with fans, pumps or compressors with the flow characteristic, the torque follows
the speed according to a specific characteristic. An insufficient torque for fans indicates that the
power transmission from the motor to the load is interrupted. For pumps, insufficient torque can
indicate a leakage or dry-running.
The converter monitors the torque based on the envelope curve depending on the speed against
a lower and upper torque.
7RUTXH>1P@
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
6SHHG>USP@
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SPD[LPXPVSHHG
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SVSHHGWKUHVKROG
If the torque lies in the impermissible range longer than time p2192, the converter reacts as
specified in p2181.
The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3.
Setting monitoring
1. Operate the drive at three different speeds in succession.
2. Set the speed thresholds p2182 … p2184 to the respective values.
3. Set the torque thresholds for each speed.
The converter displays the current torque in r0031.
4. Set p2193 = 1.
You have now set monitoring.
❒
Parameter
Overview
In applications with fans, pumps or compressors with the flow characteristic, the torque follows
the speed according to a specific characteristic. An insufficient torque for fans indicates that the
power transmission from the motor to the load is interrupted. For pumps, insufficient torque can
indicate a leakage or dry-running.
Function description
7RUTXH>1P@
%ORFNHG
%ORFNLQJPRQLWRULQJWKUHVKROGS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
/HDNDJHSXPSV
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
'U\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQRU
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGQRORDGS
EURNHQEHOW
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS 6SHHG>USP@
%ORFNLQJPRQLWRULQJS SPD[LPXPVSHHG
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SVSHHGWKUHVKROG
If the torque and speed lie in the impermissible range longer than time p2192, the converter
reacts as specified in p2181.
For applications with pumps, the converter detects the following states of the driven load:
• Blocked
• Leakage
• Dry running
For applications with fans or compressors, the converter detects the following states of the
driven load:
• Blocked
• Torn belt
The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3.
When using the control mode "U/f control" (p1300 < 10), the "Blocking protection" function
becomes active when the current limit is reached.
Blocking protection (Page 397)
S U
S U
/HDNDJH
S U
S U 'U\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQ
S U RUWRUQEHOW
S SS
Figure 8-61 Default settings for pumps
S U
'U\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQ
S U RUWRUQEHOW
S S S
S SbUSP 6SHHG>USP@
,ISSWKHQS S
,ISุSWKHQS SbUSP S SbUSP
S PLQ
Figure 8-62 Default settings for fans and compressors
Parameter
Further information
If you deselect monitoring with p2193 < 4, the converter then resets the load monitoring
parameters to factory settings.
See also
Torque monitoring (Page 398)
Function description
The converter monitors the speed or velocity of a machine component via an electromechanic
or electronic encoder, e.g. a proximity switch. Examples of how the function can be used:
• Drive belt monitoring for fans
• Blocking protection for pumps
The converter checks whether the encoder consistently supplies a 24 V signal during motor
operation. If the encoder signal fails for time p2192, the converter signals fault F07936.
S ',[
9
S W
U[ [ 7 ) S
',[
)
W
Figure 8-63 Function plan and time response of the speed monitoring
Setting monitoring
1. Set p2193 = 1.
2. Interconnect p3232 with a digital input of your choice.
3. If necessary, adjust the delay time.
You have now set monitoring.
❒
Parameter
See also
Torque monitoring (Page 398)
Overview
If you switch on the motor while it is still rotating, without the "Flying restart" function, there is
a high probability that a fault will occur as a result of overcurrent (F30001 or F07801). Examples
of applications involving an unintentionally rotating motor directly before switching on:
• The motor rotates after a brief line interruption.
• A flow of air turns the fan impeller.
• A load with a high moment of inertia drives the motor.
Requirement
The converter may operate precisely one motor only.
It is not permissible that you enable the "Flying restart" function if the converter is
simultaneously driving several motors. Exception: a mechanical coupling ensures that all of the
motors always operate with the same speed.
Function description
The "Flying restart" function comprises the following steps:
1. After the on command, the converter impresses the search current in the motor and
increases the output frequency.
2. When the output frequency reaches the actual motor speed, the converter waits for the
motor excitation build up time.
3. The converter accelerates the motor to the actual speed setpoint.
212))
W
6SHHG 7KHFRQYHUWHUPDJQHWL]HVWKH
PRWRU
&RQYHUWHURXWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
W
Figure 8-64 Principle of operation of the "flying restart" function
Parameter
Overview
The automatic restart includes two different functions:
• The converter automatically acknowledges faults.
• After a fault occurs or after a power failure, the converter automatically switches-on the
motor again.
The converter interprets the following events as power failure:
• The converter signals fault F30003 (undervoltage in the DC link), after the converter line
voltage has been briefly interrupted.
• All the converter power supplies have been interrupted and all the energy storage devices in
the converter have discharged to such a level that the converter electronics fail.
Function description
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused by the active automatic restart function
When the "automatic restart" function is active (p1210 > 1), the motor automatically starts
after a line supply phase. Unexpected movement of machine parts can result in serious injury
and material damage.
• Block off hazardous areas within the machine to prevent inadvertent access.
If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power failure or
after a fault, then you must also activate the "flying restart" function.
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 404)
Using p1210, select the automatic restart mode that best suits your application.
$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUWPRGH$5
S S S S S S S
Figure 8-65 Automatic restart modes
The principle of operation of the other parameters is explained in the following diagram and in
the table below.
VWVWDUWDWWHPSW QGVWDUWDWWHPSWLV
XQVXFFHVVIXOGXH VXFFHVVIXO
)DXOWDIWHUSRZHUIDLOXUHRU WRDQHZIDXOW
LQRSHUDWLRQ
&RXQWHUVWDUWDWWHPSWV W
S ,IVWDUWDWWHPSWFRXQWHUWKHQIDXOW
S )LVRXWSXW
S
$IWHUS>@WKHLQYHUWHUUHVHWV W
WKHVWDUWDWWHPSWFRXQWHU
$XWRPDWLFDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
W
$XWRPDWLF21FRPPDQG S S
W
6SHHG
W: VXPRIWKHWLPHVIRUDIO\LQJ
W: V W: V UHVWDUWDQGPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
PRWRU
$VWDUWDWWHPSWPXVWKDYHEHHQVXFFHVVIXOZLWKLQ W
S>@,IQRWWKHQIDXOW)LVRXWSXW
1)
The converter automatically acknowledges faults under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1 or 26: Always.
• p1210 = 4 or 6: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or via the
fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
• p1210 = 14 or 16: Never.
2)
The converter attempts to automatically switch the motor on under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1: Never.
• p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, or 26: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or
via the fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
3)
If, after a flying restart and magnetization (r0056.4 = 1) no fault occurs within one second, then the
start attempt was successful.
Figure 8-66 Time response of the automatic restart
Advanced settings
If you with to suppress the automatic restart function for certain faults, then you must enter the
appropriate fault numbers in p1206[0 … 9].
Example: p1206[0] = 07331 ⇒ No restart for fault F07331.
Suppressing the automatic restart only functions for the setting p1210 = 6, 16 or 26.
Note
Motor starts in spite of an OFF command via the fieldbus
The converter responds with a fault if fieldbus communication is interrupted. For one of the
settings p1210 = 6, 16 or 26, the converter automatically acknowledges the fault and the motor
restarts, even if the higher-level control attempts to send an OFF command to the converter.
• In order to prevent the motor automatically starting when the fieldbus communication fails,
you must enter the fault number of the communication error in parameter p1206.
Parameter
Overview
Kinetic buffering increases the drive availability. The kinetic buffering utilizes the kinetic energy
of the load to buffer line dips and failures. During a line dip, the converter keeps the motor in the
switched-on state for as long as possible. One second is a typical maximum buffer time.
Requirement
The following requirements must be fulfilled to practically use the "kinetic buffering" function:
• The driven machine has a sufficiently high inertia.
• The application allows a motor to be braked when the line supply fails.
The Vdc_min control is possible only with the PM240‑2, PM240P‑2 and PM330 Power Modules.
Function description
When the line supply dips, the DC-link voltage in the converter decreases. The kinetic buffering
(VDC min control) intervenes at an adjustable threshold. The VDC min control forces the load to go into
slightly regenerative operation. As a consequence, the converter covers its power loss and the
losses in the motor with the kinetic energy of the load. The load speed decreases, but the DC-link
voltage remains constant during the kinetic buffering. After the line supply returns, the
converter immediately resumes normal operation.
'&OLQNYROWDJH
U
W
9'&PLQFRQWUROOHULV
DFWLYH
W
6SHHG
S
W
2SHUDWLRQ
0RWRULQJ
*HQHUDWLQJ W
3RZHUIDLOXUH
Parameter
Overview
In essential service mode (ESM), the converter attempts to operate the motor for as long as
possible despite irregular ambient conditions.
The converter logs the essential service mode and any faults that occur during essential service
mode. The log is accessible only for the service and repair organization.
Note
Warranty is lost in the essential service mode
When the essential service mode is active, and faults occur in the converter, all warranty claims
associated with the converter become null and void. The faults can have the following causes:
• Exceptionally high temperatures inside and outside the converter
• Open fire inside and outside the converter
• Emissions of light, noise, particles or gases
Function description
Switching the motor on and off during active essential service mode
The OFF1, OFF2 and OFF3 commands for switching off the motor have no effect.
The converter blocks all functions that switch off the motor to save energy, e.g. PROFIenergy or
hibernation mode.
The "Safe Torque Off" safety function terminates the essential service mode.
WARNING
Unexpected exiting of the essential service mode by selecting "Safe Torque Off"
An active Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function switches the motor off, thus terminating the
essential service mode. The termination of essential service mode can cause severe injury or
death, e.g. for the failure of a flue gas extraction.
• Prevent the STO safety function from being selected in essential service mode by controlling
the converter appropriately.
• Take the unintentional selection of the STO safety function into account in the risk analysis
of the system.
P3881 determines the ESM setpoint source. If you have defined an analog input as setpoint
source using p3881, the converter can switch over to setpoint p3882 in case of wire breakage.
Example
To improve the air circulation in the stairwells, the ventilation control creates an underpressure
in the building. With this control, a fire would mean that flue gases enter into the stairwell. This
would then mean that the stairs would be blocked as escape or evacuation route.
Using the essential service mode function, the ventilation switches over to the control of an
overpressure. The essential service mode prevents the propagation of flue gas in the stairwell,
thereby keeping the stairs free as an evacuation route as long as possible.
An application example for the essential service mode can be found on the Internet:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63969509 (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63969509)
Parameters
Overview
$
%
The efficiency optimization reduces the motor losses as far as possible.
&
Active efficiency optimization has the following advantages:
• Lower energy costs
• Lower motor temperature rise
• Lower motor noise levels
Active efficiency optimization has the following disadvantage:
• Longer acceleration times and more significant speed dips during torque surges.
The disadvantage is only relevant when the motor must satisfy high requirements relating to the
dynamic performance. Even when efficiency optimization is active, the converter closed-loop
motor control prevents the motor from stalling.
Requirement
Efficiency optimization functions under the following preconditions:
• Operation with an induction motor
• Vector control is set in the converter.
Function description
,QYHUWHU
'ULYHQPDFKLQH
9DULDEOH VSHFLILHG
)OX[ 7RUTXH
6SHHG 6SHHG
The three variables that the converter can directly set, which define efficiency of an induction
motor, are speed, torque and flux.
However, in all applications, speed and torque are specified by the driven machine. As a
consequence, the remaining variable for the efficiency optimization is the flux.
The converter has two different methods of optimizing the efficiency.
,QYHUWHU
7KHUPDOPRWRU
PRGHO
(IILFLHQF\
GHSHQGHQWRQWKH
IOX[
2SWLPXPIOX[
Figure 8-69 Determining the optimum flux from the motor thermal model
Based on its thermal motor model, the converter continually determines - for the actual
operating point of the motor - the interdependency between efficiency and flux. The converter
then sets the flux to achieve the optimum efficiency.
)OX[ )OX[
(IILFLHQF\ (IILFLHQF\
(IILFLHQF\RSWLPL]DWLRQLVQRWDFWLYH
(IILFLHQF\RSWLPL]DWLRQLVDFWLYH
Figure 8-70 Qualitative result of efficiency optimization, method 2
Depending on the motor operating point, the converter either decreases or increases the flux in
partial load operation of the motor.
)OX[VHWSRLQW
S S
S
Sy
S
Sy
3DUWLDOORDGRSHUDWLRQ
1RORDG 7RUTXH
RSHUDWLRQ 5DWHGWRUTXH
Figure 8-71 Reduce the flux setpoint in the partial load range of the motor
The motor operates in partial load mode between no-load operation and the rated motor torque.
Depending on p1580, in the partial load range, the converter reduces the flux setpoint linearly
with the torque.
)OX[
S
S
(IILFLHQF\
S
The reduced flux in the motor partial load range results in higher efficiency.
Parameters
8.39 Bypass
Overview
$
%
The "Bypass" function switches the motor between converter and line operation.
&
9287
. . %,S>@
', U
%,S>@
', U
'212 S
'2&20 U
'212 S
'2&20 U
. .
. .
*1'
. .
Requirements
• The "Bypass" function is supported only for induction motors.
• The "Flying restart" function must be activated for the "Bypass" function (p1200 = 1 or 4).
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 404)
Function description
W
0RWRUUDWHGVSHHG 6WDUWXS
)O\LQJUHVWDUW
0RWRUVSHHG
S
W
U6LJQDOIRU.
&RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
S>@)HHGEDFNIURP. W
&RQYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
U6LJQDOIRU./LQH W
RSHUDWLRQ
S>@)HHGEDFNIURP. W
/LQHRSHUDWLRQ
W
S S>@ S S>@
S>@ S>@
SS>@ SS>@
Figure 8-74 Changeover when activating via a control signal (p1267.0 = 1)
The converter switches the motor between converter operation and line operation
depending on the bypass control command p1266.
• Changeover depending on the speed
,QYHUWHU 6ZLWFKRYHUSKDVH /LQHVXSSO\ 6ZLWFKRYHUSKDVH ,QYHUWHU
RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ
0RWRUUDWHGVSHHG
UVHWSRLQW5)*
SE\SDVVWKUHVKROG
W
UVLJQDOIRU.
,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
S>@IHHGEDFNVLJQDO W
RI.,QYHUWHURSHUDWLRQ
UVLJQDOIRU./LQH W
RSHUDWLRQ
S>@IHHGEDFNVLJQDO W
RI./LQHRSHUDWLRQ
W
S S>@ S S>@
S>@ S>@
SS>@ SS>@
%\SDVVVSHHGWKUHVKROG %\SDVVVSHHGWKUHVKROGKDV
UHDFKHG EHHQIDOOHQEHORZ
Figure 8-75 Changeover depending on the speed (p1267.1 = 1)
If the speed setpoint r1119 lies above the bypass speed threshold p1265, the converter
switches the motor to line operation.
If the speed setpoint falls below the bypass speed threshold, the converter switches the
motor to converter operation.
Parameter
Further information
Interaction with other functions:
• Essential service mode
The activated "Essential service mode" function influences the "Bypass" function.
Essential service mode (Page 411)
• Converter control
For operation of the motor on the line supply, the converter no longer responds to the OFF1
command, but rather only to OFF2 and OFF3.
• Temperature monitoring for the motor
The converter evaluates the temperature sensor in the motor, also for line operation of the
motor.
Motor protection with temperature sensor (Page 388)
• Disconnecting the converter from the line supply
If for line operation of the motor, you disconnect the converter from the line supply, the
converter opens the K2 contactor and the motor coasts down.
To operate the motor on the line supply also for deactivated converter, the higher-level
control must supply the signal for the K2 line contactor.
Overview
$
%
When the hibernation mode is active, the converter switches off the motor once the system
& conditions allow it.
The hibernation mode saves energy, reduces wear and noise.
Pressure and temperature controls involving pumps and fans are typical applications for the
hibernation mode.
Requirement
As long as the cascade control operates a motor directly on the supply system, the converter
does not activate the hibernation mode.
Cascade control (Page 349)
Function description
Boost speed
The boost speed prevents the motor from being switched on and off too frequently.
Parameter
Overview
$
%
A line contactor disconnects the converter from the line supply, and therefore reduces the
& converter losses when the motor is not operational.
Requirement
The line contactor control requires a 24 V power supply from the converter. The 24 V power
supply must be maintained, even when the line contactor is open.
Function description
The converter controls its own line contactor using a digital output.
'&9 9,1
9 *1',1
.
%,S
', U
Figure 8-76 Line contactor control via DO 2 with feedback signal via DI 3
'2
(QHUJL]HFRQWDFWRU
W
',
/LQHFRQWDFWRUIHHGEDFNVLJQDO
W
S S
Figure 8-77 Line contactor control via DO 2 with feedback signal via DI 3
If the line contactor feedback signal is not available for longer than the time set in p0861, then
the converter issues fault F07300.
Parameter
Overview
$
%
Fluid flow machines, which mechanically control the flow rate using valves or throttle flaps,
& operate with a constant speed corresponding to the line frequency.
/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\
+] +]
3XPS
Figure 8-78 Flow control with pump and throttle connected to a 50 Hz line supply
The lower the flow rate, the poorer the efficiency of the fluid flow machine (pump). The fluid
flow machine (pump) has the poorest efficiency when the throttle or valve is completely closed.
Further, undesirable effects can occur, for example the formation of vapor bubbles in liquids
(cavitation) or the temperature of the medium being pumped can increase.
The converter controls the flow rate by appropriately varying the speed of the fluid flow
machine. By controlling the flow rate, the fluid flow machine operates at the optimum
efficiency for each flow rate. This situation means that in the partial load range less electric
power is required than when controlling the flow rate using valves and throttles.
/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\
,QYHUWHU ,QYHUWHU
+] +]
Function description
)ORZUDWH
Flow characteristic
3RZHULQ
6SHHG SRZHU
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
6SHHGLQ
Figure 8-80 Factory setting of the flow characteristic
To set the characteristic, you require the following data from the machine manufacturer for each
speed interpolation point:
• The flow rate of the fluid-flow machine associated with the 5 selected converter speeds
• At constant speed, the power drawn which is associated with the 5 flow rates corresponds to
the line frequency and mechanical throttling of the flow rate.
Parameters
Overview
There are applications that require different converter settings.
Example:
Different motors are operated on one converter. The converter must operate with the motor data
of the particular motor and the appropriate ramp-function generator.
Function description
Note
You can only switch over the motor data of the drive data sets in the "ready for operation" state
with the motor switched off. The switchover time is approx. 50 ms.
If you do not switch over the motor data together with the drive data sets (i.e. same motor
number in p0826), then the drive data sets can also be switched over in operation.
The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2, or 3). One of the four indexes is selected
with control commands, and thereby one of the four saved settings.
The settings in the converter with the same index are called a drive data set.
0
IL[HGVHWSRLQWV
PRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
MRJJLQJ
3URWHFWLRQ $GGLWLRQDOIXQFWLRQV
RYHUFXUUHQW HQHUJ\VDYLQJPRGH
RYHUYROWDJH IO\LQJUHVWDUW
RYHUWHPSHUDWXUH FDVFDGHFRQWURO
ORDGPRQLWRULQJ ''6
''6
''6
''6
Parameter Description
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0180 Drive data set (DDS) number
Parameter Description
p0819[0] Source drive data set
p0819[1] Target drive data set
p0819[2] = 1 Starts the copy operation
Parameters
LED is ON
LED is OFF
Please contact Technical Support for LED states that are not described in the following.
RDY Explanation
Temporary state after the supply voltage is switched on.
A fault is active
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firmware
update
LNK Explanation
Communication via PROFINET is error-free
BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
The fieldbus is active, however, the converter is not receiving any process data
RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a
firmware update
BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
The fieldbus is improperly configured.
RDY In conjunction with a synchronously flashing LED RDY:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a
firmware update
BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
Overview
By evaluating the system runtime of the converter, you can decide when you should replace
components subject to wear in time before they fail - such as fans, motors and gear units.
Function description
The system runtime is started once the power supply of the converter is switched on. The system
runtime stops when the power supply is switched off.
The system runtime comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days):
System runtime = r2114[1] × days + r2114[0] × milliseconds
If r2114[0] has reached a value of 86,400,000 ms (24 hours), r2114[0] is set to the value 0 and
the value of r2114[1] is increased by 1.
Example
Parameter Description
r2114[0] System runtime (ms)
r2114[1] System runtime (days)
Parameters
I&M data
The converter supports the following identification and maintenance (I&M) data.
When requested, the converter transfers its I&M data to a higher-level control or to a PC/PG with
installed STEP 7 or TIA Portal.
I&M0
Designation Format Example for the con‐ Valid for PROFI‐ Valid for PROFI‐
tent NET BUS
Manufacturer-specific u8[10] 00 … 00 hex --- ✓
MANUFACTURER_ID u16 42d hex (=Siemens) ✓ ✓
ORDER_ID Visible String [20] "6SL3246-0BA22-1FA0" ✓ ✓
SERIAL_NUMBER Visible String [16] "T-R32015957" ✓ ✓
HARDWARE_REVISION u16 0001 hex ✓ ✓
SOFTWARE_REVISION char, u8[3] "V" 04.70.19 ✓ ✓
REVISION_COUNTER u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_ID u16 3A00 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
IM_VERSION u8[2] 01.02 ✓ ✓
IM_SUPPORTED bit[16] 001E hex ✓ ✓
Overview
An alarm generally indicates that the converter may no longer be able to maintain the operation
of the motor in future.
The extended diagnostics have an alarm buffer and an alarm history, in which the converter
stores the most recent alarms.
Function description
Alarms have the following properties:
• Incoming alarms have no direct influence on the converter.
• A warning disappears as soon as its cause is eliminated.
• Alarms do not have to be acknowledged.
Alarm code or alarm value describe the cause of the alarm.
Alarm buffer
The converter saves incoming alarms in the alarm buffer. An alarm includes an alarm code, an
alarm value, and two alarm times:
• Alarm code: r2122
• Alarm value: r2124 in fixed-point format "I32", r2134 in floating-point format "Float"
• Alarm time received = r2145 + r2123
• Alarm time removed = r2146 + r2125
The converter takes its internal time calculation to save the alarm times.
Real time clock (RTC) (Page 353)
Up to 8 alarms can be saved in the alarm buffer.
In the alarm buffer, the alarms are sorted according to "Alarm time received". If the alarm buffer
is completely filled and an additional alarm occurs, then the converter overwrites the values with
Index [7].
Alarm history
$ODUPWLPHUHFHLYHG
>@ 2OG
>@
5HPRYHGDODUP >@
>@
$ODUPEXIIHU
>@
>@
>@
,QFRPLQJDODUPZKHQDODUPEXIIHULV >@ 1HZ
FRPSOHWHO\IXOO
>@ 1HZ
>@
$ODUPKLVWRU\
>@
>@
>@ 2OG
If the alarm buffer is completely filled and an additional alarm occurs, the converter shifts all
removed alarms into the alarm history. The following occurs in detail:
1. To create space after position [8] in the alarm history, the converter shifts the alarms already
stored in the alarm history "down" by one or more positions.
If the alarm history is completely full, the converter will delete the oldest alarms.
2. The converter moves the removed alarms from the alarm buffer to the now freed up positions
of the alarm history.
Alarms that have not been removed remain in the alarm buffer.
3. The converter closes gaps in the alarm buffer that occurred when the removed alarms were
shifted in the alarm history by shifting the alarms that have not been removed "up".
4. The converter saves the received alarm as the latest alarm in the alarm buffer.
The alarm history saves up to 56 alarms.
In the alarm history, alarms are sorted according to the "alarm time received". The latest alarm
has Index [8].
Parameter
Table 9-7 Parameters of the alarm buffer and the alarm history
Overview
A fault generally indicates that the converter can no longer maintain the operation of the motor.
The extended diagnostics have a fault buffer and a fault history, in which the converter stores the
most recent faults.
Function description
Faults have the following properties:
• In general, a fault leads to the motor being switched off.
• A fault must be acknowledged.
Fault buffer
The converter saves incoming faults in the fault buffer. A fault includes a fault code, a fault value,
and two fault times:
• Fault code: r0945
The fault code and fault value describe the cause of the fault.
• Fault value: r0949 in fixed-point format "I32", r2133 in floating-point format "Float"
• Fault time received = r2130 + r0948
• Fault time removed = r2136 + r2109
The converter takes its internal time calculation to save the fault times.
Real time clock (RTC) (Page 353)
Up to 8 faults can be saved in the fault buffer.
In the fault buffer, the faults are sorted according to "Fault time received". If the fault buffer is
completely full, and an additional fault is received in the fault buffer, then the converter
overwrites the values with Index [7].
Acknowledge fault
To acknowledge a fault, you have the following options:
• PROFIdrive control word 1, bit 7 (r2090.7)
• Acknowledge via a digital input
• Acknowledge via the Operator Panel
• Switch off the converter power supply and switch on again
Faults detected during the converter-internal monitoring of hardware and firmware can be
acknowledged only by switching the supply voltage off and on again. In the list of faults in the
List Manual, at the corresponding fault codes you may find the information on limitations when
acknowledging.
Fault history
)DXOWEXIIHU )DXOWKLVWRU\
&RS\IDXOWV
$FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
Figure 9-4 Fault history after acknowledging the faults
If at least one of the fault causes in the fault buffer has been removed and you acknowledge the
faults, the following takes place:
1. The converter shifts the values previously saved in the fault history each by eight indices.
The converter deletes the faults that were saved in the indexes [56 … 63] before the
acknowledgement.
2. The converter copies the contents of the fault buffer to the memory locations [8 … 15] in the
fault history.
3. The converter deletes the faults that have been removed from the fault buffer.
The faults that have not been removed are now saved both in the fault buffer and in the fault
history.
4. The converter writes the time of acknowledgement of the removed faults to "Fault time
removed".
The "Fault time removed" of the faults that have not been removed retains the value = 0.
The fault history can contain up to 56 faults.
Parameter
Table 9-9 Parameters of the fault buffer and the fault history
Repair
WARNING
Fire or electric shock due to improper repair
Improper repair of the converter may cause malfunctions or result in consequential damage
such as fire or electric shock.
• Only commission the following persons to repair the converter:
– Siemens customer service
– A repair center that has been authorized by Siemens
– Specialist personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating
procedures contained in this manual.
• Only use original spare parts when carrying out repairs.
For environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment, and dispose of
the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use.
Overview
You are only permitted to replace a Control Unit with a different Control Unit under certain
preconditions. After the replacement, you must transfer the settings of the Control Unit that was
replaced to the new Control Unit.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply for making a replacement:
• The new Control Unit is the same type as the Control Unit that was replaced.
• The new Control Unit has the same or more recent firmware version than that of the Control
Unit that was replaced.
Description
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused when using an inappropriate Control Unit
Replacing Control Units of different types can result in incomplete or inappropriate/incorrect
converter settings. As a consequence, machines can unexpectedly move, e.g. speed
oscillation, overspeed or incorrect direction of rotation. Unexpected machine motion can result
in death, injury and/or material damage.
• In all cases not permitted according to the above precondition, you must recommission the
drive after replacing the Control Unit.
WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused by inappropriate/incorrect converter settings
Missing or incorrect converter settings can lead to unexpected operating states or machine
movements, e.g. a non-functioning EMERGENCY STOP or an incorrect direction of rotation. As
a consequence, machine components or devices can become damaged or death or bodily
injury may result.
• If possible, back up the settings of the Control Unit to be replaced by uploading them to an
external storage medium, e.g. a memory card.
• Transfer the settings of the Control Unit that was replaced per download to the new Control
Unit.
• If you do not have a backup of the converter settings, commission the converter as new
converter.
• After replacing the Control Unit, you must check the function of the converter.
Procedure
1. Switch off the line voltage to the Power Module.
2. If being used, switch off the supply voltage for the digital outputs on the Control Unit.
3. If being used, switch off the external 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
4. Carefully check that the Control Unit terminals have a no voltage condition.
5. Remove the signal cables from the Control Unit.
6. Remove the defective Control Unit.
7. Mount the new Control Unit on the Power Module.
8. Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
9. Switch on all of the converter power supplies again.
10.Set the new converter to suit the application:
– If the settings of the replaced Control Unit are backed up on an external storage medium,
transfer the settings using a download.
Downloading the converter settings (Page 457)
– If there is no data backup of the replaced Control Unit, commission the converter as new
converter.
You have replaced the Control Unit.
❒
Overview
We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the converter. The
converter automatically imports its settings from the inserted memory card.
Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched off.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Insert the memory card into the converter.
2. Switch on the power supply for the converter.
3. The converter loads the settings from the memory card.
4. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028:
The converter accepts the settings that have been loaded.
You have transferred the settings to the converter.
❒
10.2.2 Manual downloading from the memory card with the BOP-2
Overview
If you have backed up the settings of several converters on the memory card, the settings
download must be started manually.
Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Insert the memory card into the converter.
2. Select the download.
2. 2.
3. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
2.
5. Wait until the converter has transferred the settings from the memory card.
2.
6. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.
2.
2.
You have transferred the settings from the memory card to the converter.
❒
Overview
If you have backed up the settings of several converters on the memory card, the settings
download must be started manually.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online & diagnostics".
3. Select "Back up/reset".
4. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
5. Start the data transfer.
6. Wait until Startdrive has signaled that the data transfer has been completed.
7. Go offline.
You have transferred your settings from a memory card to the converter.
❒
Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the BOP-2 operator panel back into
the converter.
Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Attach the Operator Panel to the converter.
2. Select the download from the operator panel to the converter.
2. 2.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
6. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.
2.
2.
Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the IOP-2 operator panel back into
the converter.
Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Connect the operator panel to the converter.
2. Start the download.
0HQX 8S'RZQORDG
'RZQORDGSDQHOWRGULYH
8SORDGGULYHWRSDQHO
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 'HOHWHSDQHOSDUDPHWHUVHW
'ULYHWRPHPRU\FDUG
0HPRU\FDUGWRGULYH
8S 5HQDPHSDUDPHWHUVHW
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV
$FWLYHIDXOWVDODUPV
+LVWRU\
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV ,GHQWLILFDWLRQ0DLQWHQDQFH
,2VWDWXV
&RPPXQLFDWLRQVVWDWXV
8S ,2VLPXODWLRQ
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV
'ULYHHQDEOHV
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
5. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
0HQX ([WUDV
'ULYHIDFWRU\UHVHW
6WDWXVVFUHHQZL]DUG 6DIHIDFWRU\UHVHW
'ULYHLGHQWLW\ 'HIDXOWGDWDVHW
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 3DUDPHWHUVHWWLQJV 3DUDPHWHUVDYLQJPRGH
3DQHOVHWWLQJV 6DYH5$0WR520
8S
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV
Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the digital terminal device back
into the converter.
Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Attach the Smart Access to the converter.
2. Connect your terminal device with the Smart Access.
3. Select the file for restoring the converter settings.
4. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
You transferred the settings from the Smart Access to the new converter.
❒
Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that have been backed up to a PC back to the converter.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The PC and converter are connected with one another.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download from the PC using Startdrive (Page 465)
Function description
Procedure
1. Open the Startdrive project that matches the drive.
2. Select "Load to device".
3. Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
You transferred the settings from the PC to the new converter.
❒
Overview
The know-how protection function prevents converter settings from being copied.
There are two options to avoid recommissioning after a converter has been replaced.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The end user uses a SIEMENS memory card.
• The machine manufacturer (OEM) has an identical machine.
Function description
Procedure 1: The machine manufacturer only knows the serial number of the new
converter
1. The end customer provides the machine manufacturer with the following information:
– For which machine must the converter be replaced?
– What is the serial number (r7758) of the new converter?
2. The machine manufacturer performs the following steps online on the prototype machine:
– Deactivating know-how protection
Activating and deactivating know-how protection (Page 230)
– Enter the serial number of the new converter in p7759.
– Enter the serial number of the inserted memory card as reference serial number in p7769.
– Activate know-how protection with copy protection. "Copy RAM to ROM" must be
activated.
– Write the configuration with p0971 = 1 to the memory card.
– Send the memory card to the end customer.
3. The end user inserts the memory card.
4. The end user switches on the converter power supply.
5. The converter checks the serial numbers of the card and the converter, and when there is a
match the converter goes into the "Ready for switching on" state.
If the numbers do not match, then the converter signals fault F13100 (no valid memory
card).
The settings have been transferred to the converter.
❒
Procedure 2: The machine manufacturer knows the serial number of the new converter
and the serial number of the memory card
1. The end customer provides the machine manufacturer with the following information:
– For which machine must the converter be replaced?
– What is the serial number (r7758) of the new converter?
– What is the serial number of the memory card?
2. The machine manufacturer performs the following steps online on the prototype machine:
– Deactivating know-how protection
Activating and deactivating know-how protection (Page 230)
– Enter the serial number of the new converter in p7759.
– Enter the serial number of the customer's memory card as reference serial number in
p7769.
– Activate know-how protection with copy protection. "Copy RAM to ROM" must be
activated.
– Write the configuration with p0971 = 1 to the memory card.
– Copy the encrypted project from the card to the associated PC.
– Send the encrypted project to the end customer, e.g. via e-mail.
3. The end user copies the project to the Siemens memory card that belongs to the machine.
4. The end user inserts the Siemens memory card into the converter.
5. The end user switches on the converter power supply.
6. The converter checks the serial numbers of the card and the converter, and when there is a
match the converter goes into the "Ready for switching on" state.
If the numbers do not match, then the converter signals fault F13100 (no valid memory
card).
The settings have been transferred to the converter.
❒
Overview
You are only permitted to replace the Power Module by another Power Module under certain
specific preconditions.
Requirement
The following preconditions apply when making a replacement:
• The new and replaced Power Modules have the same power rating.
• The new Power Module has a different power rating than the replaced Power Module,
however still the same frame size.
In this case, the rated power of the Power Module and the rated power of the motor must not
differ too much.
The following values are permissible for the quotients (rated motor power)/(rated Power
Module power):
– 200 V Power Modules and 400 V Power Modules: 0.25 … 1.5
– 690 V Power Modules: 0.5 …1.5
Description
Procedure
1. Switch off the line voltage to the Power Module.
You do not have to switch off an external 24 V power supply for the Control Unit if one is being
used.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the Power Module.
3. Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module.
4. Replace the previous Power Module with the new Power Module.
5. Mount the Control Unit onto the new Power Module.
6. Connect up the new Power Module using the connecting cables.
NOTICE
Motor damage due to interchanged motor connecting cables
The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you exchange the two phases of the
motor line. A motor with an incorrect direction of rotation can damage the machine or
installation. Driven loads with only one permissible direction of rotation include certain
compressors, saws and pumps, for example.
• Connect the 3 phases of the motor lines in the correct sequence.
• After replacing the Power Module, check the direction of motor rotation.
7. Switch on the line supply and, if necessary, the 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
Overview
Converters with PROFINET interface support "Device replacement without removable data
storage medium".
Requirement
The topology of the PROFINET IO system with the IO device involved is configured in the higher-
level control system.
Function description
The converter can be replaced without having to insert a removable data storage medium (e.g.
a memory card) with the saved device names in the converter – or having to reassign the device
names using a PG.
Further information
Details of the device replacement without removable storage medium can be found on the
Internet:
PROFINET system description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
19292127)
10.5.1 Overview
&RQYHUWHULVUHDG\
6ZLWFKRIIWKH
SRZHUVXSSO\
/('2))
,QVHUWPHPRU\FDUGZLWKWKH
ILUPZDUH):
6ZLWFKRQ
WKHSRZHUVXSSO\
):YHUVLRQFDUG
1R
):YHUVLRQFRQYHUWHU"
):YHUVLRQFDUG
<HV ! 1R
):YHUVLRQFRQYHUWHU"
7KHFRQYHUWHUUHVWRUHVLWVIDFWRU\
VHWWLQJV
<HV
)LUPZDUHXSJUDGH )LUPZDUHGRZQJUDGH
7KHFRQYHUWHUORDGVWKH 7KHFRQYHUWHUORDGVWKHILUPZDUH
ILUPZDUH
'DWDEDFNXS
DYDLODEOHRQWKHPHPRU\ 1R
FDUG"
<HV
6ZLWFKRIIWKH
SRZHUVXSSO\
/('2))
DQGVZLWFKRQDJDLQ
7KHLQYHUWHULVUHDG\
Overview
You can load the converter firmware from the Internet to a memory card.
Precondition
You have the appropriate memory card.
Recommended memory cards (Page 212)
Function description
Procedure
1. Download the required firmware to your PC from the Internet.
Download (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67364620)
2. Extract the files to a directory of your choice on your PC.
3. Transfer the unzipped files into the root directory of the memory card.
Figure 10-2 Example of memory card contents after the file transfer
Depending on the firmware, the filenames and the number of files may differ from the display
above.
The "USER" directory does not exist on unused memory cards. After the memory card is
plugged in for the first time, the converter creates a new "USER" directory.
You have prepared the memory card for the firmware upgrade or downgrade.
❒
Overview
When upgrading the firmware, you replace the converter firmware by a later version.
Requirement
• Your converter's firmware is at least version V4.5.
• Converter and memory card have different firmware versions.
Function description
Procedure
3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the converter slot
until it latches into place.
converter:
• You remove the memory card:
⇒ The converter keeps its settings.
Overview
When downgrading the firmware, you replace the converter firmware by an older version.
Requirement
• Your converter's firmware is at least version V4.6.
• Converter and memory card have different firmware versions.
• You have backed up your settings on the memory card, in an Operator Panel or in a PC.
Function description
Procedure
3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the converter slot
until it latches into place.
converter:
• The memory card contains a data backup:
⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
• There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has the factory setting.
9. Switch on the converter power supply again.
10 If the firmware downgrade was successful, after several seconds
. the converter LED RDY turns green. 5'<
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the previous
content of the memory card, one of the two following cases has
occurred:
Requirements
Firmware version:
• When upgrading, the converter has firmware version V4.5 as a minimum.
• When downgrading, as a minimum the converter has firmware version V4.6.
Function description
To correct a failed firmware upgrade or downgrade you can check the following:
• Have you inserted the card properly?
• Does the card contain the correct firmware?
Repeat the firmware upgrade or downgrade
Case 1
• The motor is switched off.
• You cannot communicate with the converter, either via the operator panel or other
interfaces.
• The LEDs flicker and after 3 minutes the converter has still not powered up.
Procedure
1. Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the converter.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as required until the converter outputs fault F01018.
5. Set p0971 = 1.
6. Switch off the converter power supply.
7. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
The converter now powers up with the factory settings.
8. Recommission the converter.
You have restored the converter factory settings.
❒
Case 2
• The motor is switched off.
• You cannot communicate with the converter, either via the operator panel or other
interfaces.
• The LEDs flash and are dark - this process is continually repeated.
Procedure
1. Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the converter.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
4. Wait until the LEDs flash orange.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as required until the converter outputs fault F01018.
6. Now set p0971 = 1.
7. Switch off the converter power supply.
8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
The converter now powers up with the factory settings.
9. Recommission the converter.
You have restored the converter factory settings.
❒
1) The following applies to systems compliant with UL: A maximum of 3 A 30 VDC or 2 A 250 VAC may be connected via terminals
18 / 20 (DO 0 NC) and 23 / 25 (DO 2 NC).
',11L
SSP.
5HVLVWDQFH
LQ˖ /*1L
3W
7HPSHUDWXUHLQr&
Figure 11-1 Temperature sensor characteristic of analog inputs AI 2 and AI 3
Definitions
Base load
Constant load between the accelerating phases of the drive
VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDGXSWRN: +LJK2YHUORDGXSWRN:
,
,+2
,/2 ,
,/2
,+2
,/2
,+2
V V V
V V V
V
V
W>V@
W>V@
VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDGIURPN: +LJK2YHUORDGIURPN:
,
,
,/2
,+2
,/2
,+2
V V
V V
V
V
W>V@
W>V@
Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 40 °C … + 70 °C, according to Class 2K4 to EN 60721‑3‑2
maximum humidity 95 % at 40 °C
Mechanical ambient condi‐ FSA … FSC: Shock and vibration permissible according to 1M2 to EN 60721‑3‑2
tions FSD … FSF: Shock and vibration permissible according to 2M3 to EN 60721‑3‑2
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 2C2 to EN 60721‑3‑2
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 2B1 to EN 60721‑3‑2
tions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 25 °C … + 55 °C, according to Class 1K3 to EN 60721‑3‑1
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 1C2 to EN 60721‑3‑1
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 1B1 according to EN 60721‑3‑1
tions
Property Version
Ambient conditions in operation
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without derating,
> 1000 m Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Climatic ambient • Temperature range without derating 2)
conditions 1) – LO base load power: 0 °C...40 °C
– HO base load power: 0 °C...50 °C
For higher temperatures.
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, salt mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing
water and water jets are not permitted
Mechanical ambient condi‐ FSA … FSF: Vibration levels permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3
tions FSA … FSC: Shock, permissible according to Class 3M2 to EN 60721-3-3
FSD … FSF: Shock permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3
Protection against chemical Protected according to 3C2 to EN 60721‑3‑3
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to 3B1 to EN 60721‑3‑3
tions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
Cooling Forced air cooling AF, according to EN 60146
Cooling air clean and dry air
1)
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better than Class 3K3 to EN 60721-3-3
2)
Observe the permissible ambient temperatures for the Control Unit and possibly the operator panel (IOP-2 or BOP‑2).
Property Version
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 AC ± 10%
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … input voltage x 0.95 (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 Hz … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ 0.9
Line impedance Uk ≤ 1%, no line reactor permitted
Inrush current Low LO base load input current
Pulse frequency (factory set‐ 4 kHz
ting) The pulse frequency can be increased in 2 kHz steps up to 16 kHz (up to 8 kHz for 75 kW and 90
kW). An increase in the pulse frequency results in a lower output current.
Braking methods DC braking
Degree of protection IP55 To comply with this degree of protection requires the following:
• Operation with operator panel or dummy cover
• Connections for control cables are made properly using EMC cable glands.
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Rated short-circuit current When fused using a type J or 3NE1 fuse, rated voltage 480 VAC
with the rated current of the specific converter.
FSA ... FSC: 40 kA
FSD ... FSF: 65 kA
Property Version
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 AC ± 10%
Output voltage 3-phase 0 VAC … input voltage x 0.95 (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 Hz … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ 0.9
Line impedance Uk ≤ 1%, line reactor not permissible
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Pulse frequency (factory set‐ 4 kHz
ting) The pulse frequency can be increased in 2 kHz steps up to 16 kHz (up to 8 kHz for 55 kW and
75 kW). An increase in the pulse frequency results in a lower output current.
Electromagnetic compatibility Devices with filters in compliance with EN 61800-3: 2004 are suitable for Category C2 envi‐
ronments.
Braking methods DC braking
Degree of protection IP20 built-in units IP20 when mounted in a control cabinet
PT devices IP54 on the control cabinet wall
Operating temperature at LO base load power without derating 0° C … +40° C
HO base load power without derating 0° C … +50° C
LO/HO base load power with derating: Up to 60° C
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Storage temperature -40° C … +70° C
Relative humidity < 95% - condensation not permissible
Pollution Protected according to pollution degree 2 according to EN 61800-5-1: 2007
Ambient conditions Protected against damaging chemical substances according to environmental class 3C2 ac‐
cording to EN 60721-3-3: 1995
Shock and vibration • Long-term storage in the transport packaging according to Class 1M2 according to
EN 60721‑3‑1: 1997
• Transport in the transport packaging according to Class 2M3 according to EN 60721-3-2:
1997
• Vibration during operation according to Class 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3: 1995
Installation altitude without derat‐ up to 1000 m above Restrictions for special ambient conditions
ing: sea level (Page 554)
with derating: up to 4000 m above
sea level
Permissible short-circuit cur‐ Frame size D ... F: 65 kA 1)
rent
Overvoltage category Supply circuits: Overvoltage category III
Non-supply circuits: Overvoltage category II
Standards UL 1),2), CE, C-tick
The drive only satisfies the UL requirements when UL-certified fuses are used.
1)
If fuse-protected with a listed Class J or 3NE1 fuse, rated voltage 600 VAC with the rated current of the specific converter.
2)
UL available soon for frame sizes D … F
Table 11-13 PM230, IP20, frame size B, 3-phase 380 … 480 VAC
The permissible cable length to the motor also depends on the cable type and the selected pulse frequency.
1)
Values apply to IP20 versions only.
VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDG +LJK2YHUORDG
,
,/2 ,
,/2
,+2
,/2
,+2
V V V
V V
V
V
W>V@
W>V@
Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 40 °C … + 70 °C, according to Class 2K4 to EN 60721‑3‑2:1997
maximum humidity 95% at 40 °C
Mechanical ambient condi‐ Shocks and vibrations permissible according to 2M3 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
tions
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 2C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
substances
Biological environmental Suitable according to Class 2B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
conditions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 25 °C … + 55 °C, according to Class 1K3 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 1C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
substances
Biological environmental Suitable according to Class 1B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
conditions
Ambient conditions in operation
Property Version
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without derating,
> 1000 m Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Climatic ambient • Frame sizes FSD ... FSF temperature range 2)
conditions 1) – in operation acc. to LO: -20 °C … +40 °C
– in operation acc. to HO: -20 °C … +50 °C
– for higher temperatures
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing water and
water jets are not permitted
Mechanical ambient condi‐ • Vibration levels permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3:2002
tions • Shocks permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3:2002
Protection against chemical Protected according to 3C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
substances
Biological environmental Suitable according to 3B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑3: 2002
conditions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
Cooling Forced air cooling AF, according to EN 60146
Cooling air Clean and dry air
1)
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better than 3K3 according to IEC
60721-3-3: 2002
2)
Observe the permissible ambient temperatures for the Control Unit and possibly the operator panel (IOP-2 or BOP‑2).
Property Version
Line voltage 3 AC 380 V … 480 V ± 10% (in operation -20% < 1 min)
Line system configurations Grounded TN/TT line systems or non-grounded IT line systems
Line impedance Uk < 4%, line reactor is not required
Power factor λ > 0.9
Output voltage 3 AC 0 V … 0.95 x input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category ac‐ III for line supplies
cording to EN 61800-5-1
Pulse frequency Factory setting
• 4 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 75 kW
• 2 kHz for devices with an LO base load power ≥ 75 kW
Can be adjusted in 2 kHz steps as follows:
• 2 kHz … 16 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 55 kW
• 2 kHz … 8 kHz for devices with an LO base load power ≥ 55 kW
• 2 kHz … 4 kHz for devices with an LO base load power ≥ 110 kW
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum output current.
Short-circuit current rating ≤ 100 kA rms
(SCCR) and branch protec‐ Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
tion support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479152)
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking
Degree of protection ac‐ IP20 Must be installed in a control cabinet
cording to EN 60529
Protection class according The converters are devices with protection class I
to EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection according DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
to EN 50274
Cooling in compliance with Forced air cooling AF
EN 60146
*) Factory setting
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected
Property Version
Line voltage 3 AC 500 V … 690 V ± 10% (in operation -20% < 1 min)
with Class J fuses, maximum 600 V
Line system configurations Grounded TN/TT line systems or non-grounded IT line systems
Line impedance Uk < 4%, line reactor is not required
Power factor λ > 0.9
Output voltage 3 AC 0 V … 0.95 × input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category ac‐ III for line supplies
cording to EN 61800-5-1
Pulse frequency 2 kHz (factory setting), can be adjusted to 4 kHz
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum output current.
Short-circuit current rating ≤ 100 kA rms
(SCCR) and branch protec‐ Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
tion support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479152)
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking
Degree of protection accord‐ IP20; must be installed in a control cabinet
ing to EN 60529
Protection class according The converters are devices with protection class I
to EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection according DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
to EN 50274
Cooling in compliance with Forced air cooling AF
EN 60146
The permissible motor cable length depends on the cable type and the selected pulse frequency.
RYHUORDGIRUVHFRQGV
RYHUORDGIRUVHFRQGV
RYHUORDGIRUVHFRQGV
%DVHORDGIRUVHFRQGV
%DVHORDGIRUVHFRQGV
/2EDVHORDG
+2EDVHORDG
W>V@ W>V@
Electrical data
Line system configurations Grounded TN/TT systems or ungrounded IT systems (a grounded phase conductor is not per‐
missible in 690 V line supplies)
Line requirement A line reactor (2% uk) must be connected in series
Line voltage 380 V (-10 %) ... 480 V (+10 %)
500 V (-10 %) ... 690 V (+10 %)
Line frequency 47 … 63 Hz
Output frequency 0 ... 100 Hz
Displacement factor cos φ 0.96
power factor λ 0.75 ... 0.93 (with line reactor uk = 2%)
Converter efficiency > 98%
Short-circuit current rating ac‐ 160 ... 630 kW: 100 kA
cording to IEC, in conjunction
with the specified fuses
Short-circuit current rating ac‐ 160 ... 630 kW: 100 kA
cording to UL61800-5-1 (up Can be used on line supplies that cannot supply more than 100 kA symmetrically at a maximum
to 480 V AC or 600 V AC), in voltage of 480 V AC or 600 V AC when they are protected with the semiconductor fuses
conjunction with the speci‐ specified in Chapter "Technical Data" of this manual.
fied fuses
Overvoltage category III according to EN 61800-5-1
Mechanical data
Degree of protection IP20
Protection class according to EN 61800-5-1: Class I (with protective conductor system) and Class III (PELV)
Cooling method Forced air cooling AF according to EN 60146
Sound pressure level LPA (1 ≤ 74 dB(A) 1)
ma)
Note
Recommended connection cross-sections
The recommended connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at 45 °C ambient
temperature and cables with a permitted operating temperature at the conductor of 70 °C
(routing type C - factor for bundling 0.75 considered) according to DIN VDE 0298-4/08.03).
Protective conductor cross-section (S: Cross-section of the supply connection phase
conductor, MS: Cross-section of the external protective conductor):
Minimum cross-sections:
• S < 16 mm² → MS = S
• 16 mm² ≤ S ≤ 35 mm² → MS = 16 mm²
• S > 35 mm² → MS = 0.5 × S
Recommended cross-sections:
• MS ≥ S
Table 11-30 PM330 frame sizes GX, 3-phase 380 … 480 VAC
Table 11-31 PM330, frame size HX, 3-phase 380 … 480 VAC
3)
When connecting a Braking Module with rated power 50 kW, P20 power 200 kW.
Table 11-32 PM330, frame size JX, 3-phase 380 … 480 VAC
Table 11-33 PM330, frame size HX, 3-phase 500 … 690 VAC, Part 1
Table 11-34 PM330, frame size HX, 3-phase 500 … 690 VAC, Part 2
VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDG +LJK2YHUORDG
,
,+2
,/2 ,
,/2
,+2
,/2
,+2
V V V
V V V
V
V
W>V@
W>V@
Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Air-conditioning ‑ 40° C … + 70° C, according to Class 2K4 to EN 60721‑3‑2:1997
maximum humidity 95% at 40 °C
Mechanical system Shock and vibration permissible according to 1M2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
Chemical substances Protected according to Class 2C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 2B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
tions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging or in transport packaging
Air-conditioning ‑ 25 °C … + 55° C, according to Class 1K3 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
Chemical substances Protected according to Class 1C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 1B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
tions
Ambient conditions in operation
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without limitations
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Property Version
Air-conditioning 1) • FSA ... FSC ambient operating temperature 2)
– For operation according to Low Overload: -10 °C … +40 °C
– For operation according to High Overload: -10 °C … +50 °C
– Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
• FSD ... FSG ambient operating temperature 2)
– For operation according to Low Overload: -20 °C … +40 °C
– For operation according to High Overload: -20 °C … +50 °C
– Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing water and
water jets are not permitted
Mechanical system Vibration test during operation according to IEC 60068-2-6 Test Fc (sinusoidal)
• 0 ... 57 Hz: 0.075 mm deflection amplitude
• 57 ... 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration amplitude
• 10 frequency cycles per axis
Shock test according to IEC 60068-2-27 Test Ea (half-sine)
• 5 g peak acceleration
• 30 ms duration
• 3 shocks in all three axes in both directions
Chemical substances • FSA … FSC: Protected according to 3C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
• FSD … FSG: Protected according to 3C3 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to 3B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑3: 2002
tions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
Cooling Forced air cooling AF, according to EN 60146
Cooling air Clean and dry air
Noise emission Maximum 75 db(A)
1)
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better than 3K3 according to IEC
60721-3-3: 2002
2)
Observe the permissible ambient operating temperatures for the Control Unit and the Operator Panel (IOP-2 or BOP‑2).
Property Version
Line voltage FSA … FSC 200 V … 240 V 1 AC ± 10% 0.55 kW … 4 kW - LO
0.37 kW … 3 kW - HO
200 V … 240 V 3 AC ± 10% 0.55 kW … 7.5 kW - LO
0.37 kW … 5.5 kW - HO
FSD … FSF 200 V … 240 V 3 AC ± 10% (in op‐ 11 kW … 55 kW - LO
eration -20% < 1 min) 7,5 kW … 45 kW - HO
Line supply configurations Grounded TN/TT line supplies or non-grounded IT line supplies
Connecting the line supply and motor (Page 84)
Line impedance FSA … FSC 2% ≤ Uk < 4%. For Uk < 2%, we recommend a line reactor, or a Power Module
with the next higher power rating.
FSD … FSF No restrictions
Power factor λ FSA … FSC 0.7 without line reactor for Uk ≥ 2%
0.85 with line reactor for Uk < 2%
FSD … FSF > 0.9
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … 0.95 × input voltage
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category ac‐ III for line supplies
cording to EN 61800-5-1
Pulse frequency 4 kHz (factory setting),
Adjustable in steps of 2 kHz.
Current reduction as a function of the pulse frequency (Page 531)
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum output current.
Short-circuit current Maximum permissible line short-circuit current ≤ 100 kA rms
(SCCR) and branch protec‐ Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
tion support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479152)
Degree of protection ac‐ IP20
cording to EN 60529 IP55 PT devices outside the control cabinet
Protection class according The converters are devices with protection class I
to EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection according DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
to EN 50274
Cooling in compliance with Forced air cooling AF
EN 60146
Safety Integrated See function manual "Safety Integrated"
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
*) Factory setting
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected.
Property Version
Line voltage FSA … FSC 380 V … 480 V 3 AC ± 10%
FSD … FSG 380 V … 480 V 3 AC ± 10% (in operation -20% < 1 min)
Line supply configurations Grounded TN/TT line supplies or non-grounded IT line supplies
Connecting the line supply and motor (Page 84)
Line impedance FSA … FSC 1% ≤ Uk < 4%, for values smaller than 1%, we recommend a line reactor, or a
Power Module with the next higher power rating.
FSD … FSG No restrictions
Power factor λ FSA … FSC 0.7 without line reactor for Uk ≥ 1%
0.85 with line reactor for Uk < 1%
FSD … FSG > 0.9
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … 0.95 x input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category ac‐ III for line supplies
cording to EN 61800-5-1
Pulse frequency Factory setting
• 4 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 110 kW
• 2 kHz for devices with an LO base load power ≥ 110 kW
Can be adjusted in 2 kHz steps as follows:
• 2 kHz … 16 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 55 kW
• 2 kHz … 8 kHz for devices with an LO base load output of 55 kW … 250 kW
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum output current.
Current reduction as a function of the pulse frequency (Page 541)
Short-circuit current (SCCR) Maximum permissible line short-circuit current ≤ 100 kA rms
and branch protection Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479152)
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking chopper
Degree of protection accord‐ IP20
ing to EN 60529 IP55 PT devices outside the control cabinet
Protection class according The converters are devices with protection class I
to EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection according DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
to EN 50274
Cooling in compliance with Forced air cooling AF
EN 60146
Safety Integrated See function manual "Safety Integrated"
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
*) Factory setting
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected
Property Version
Line voltage • for systems according to IEC: 500 V … 690 V 3 AC ± 10% (in operation
-20% < 1 min)
• for systems according to UL 500 V … 600 V 3 AC ± 10% (in operation -20%
< 1 min)
filtered devices only with Slash Rating (600Y/347V AC)
Line supply configu‐ Grounded TN/TT line supplies or non-grounded IT line supplies
rations Connecting the line supply and motor (Page 84)
Line impedance No restrictions
Power factor λ > 0.9
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … 0.95 x input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage catego‐ III for line supplies
ry according to EN
61800-5-1
Pulse frequency 2 kHz (factory setting), can be adjusted to 4 kHz
Adjustable in steps of 2 kHz.
Current reduction as a function of the pulse frequency (Page 546)
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum
output current.
Short-circuit current Maximum permissible line short-circuit current ≤ 100 kA rms
(SCCR) and branch Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC
protection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479152)
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking
chopper
Degree of protection IP20; must be installed in a control cabinet
according to EN
60529
Protection class ac‐ The converters are devices with protection class I
cording to EN
61800-5-1
Touch protection ac‐ DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
cording to EN 50274
Cooling in compli‐ Forced air cooling AF
ance with EN 60146
Safety Integrated See function manual "Safety Integrated"
Overview of the manuals (Page 573)
*) Factory setting
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected
VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDG +LJK2YHUORDG
,
,+2
,/2 ,
,/2
,+2
,/2
,+2
V V V
V V V
V
V
W>V@
W>V@
Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 40° C … + 70° C, according to Class 2K4 to EN 60721‑3‑2
maximum humidity 95% at 40 °C
Mechanical ambient condi‐ FSC: Shock and vibration permissible according to 1M2 to EN 60721‑3‑2
tions FSD … FSF: Shock and vibration permissible according to 2M3 to EN 60721‑3‑2
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 2C2 to EN 60721‑3‑2
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 2B1 to EN 60721‑3‑2
tions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 25 °C … + 55 °C, according to Class 1K3 to EN 60721‑3‑1
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 1C2 to EN 60721‑3‑1
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to class 1B1 to EN 60721‑3‑1
tions
Ambient conditions in operation
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without limitations
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Property Version
Climatic ambient • Ambient operating temperature 2)
conditions 1) – For operation according to Low Overload: 0° C … +40° C
– For operation according to High Overload: 0° C … +50° C
– Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, salt mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing
water and water jets are not permitted
Mechanical ambient condi‐ • FSC … FSF: Vibration levels permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3
tions • FSC: Shock, permissible according to Class 3M2 to EN 60721-3-3
• FSD … FSF: Shock permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3
Protection against chemical Protected according to 3C2 to EN 60721‑3‑3
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to 3C2 to EN 60721‑3‑3
tions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1, condensation
not permitted
Cooling Forced air cooling AF, according to EN 60146
Cooling air Clean and dry air
1)
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better than 3K3 according to EN
60721-3-3
2)
Observe the permissible ambient temperatures for the Control Unit and possibly the operator panel (IOP-2 or BOP‑2).
Property Version
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 AC ± 10%
Line impedance Uk < 1% (RSC > 100), a line reactor is not permitted
Output voltage 3-phase 0 VAC … input voltage x 0.87 (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ 0.9
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Pulse frequency (factory set‐ 4 kHz
ting) The pulse frequency can be adjusted up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. The higher the pulse frequency,
the lower the available output current.
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 554)
Electromagnetic compatibili‐ The devices comply with EN 61800-3: 2004 suitable for Category C2 and C3 environments.
ty
Braking methods DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
Degree of protection IP20 built-in devices (they must be installed in a switch cabinet)
Note
The values for Low Overload (LO) are identical with those of the rated values.
Note
Using Power Modules connected to TN line supplies with voltages ≥ 600 V for installation
altitudes 2000 m … 4000 m
For voltages ≥ 600 V, the TN line supply must have a grounded neutral point established using
an isolating transformer.
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
+LJK2YHUORDG
/RZ2YHUORDG
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>r&@
Figure 11-9 Characteristic for the PM230 Power Module
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>r&@
Figure 11-10 Characteristic for the PM330 Power Module
2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
+LJK2YHUORDG
/RZ2YHUORDG
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>r&@
Figure 11-11 Characteristic for the PM250 Power Module
Overview
Protection of workers from electromagnetic fields is specified in the European EMF Directive
2013/35/EU. This directive is implemented in national law in the European Economic Area (EEA).
Employers are obligated to design workplaces in such a way that workers are protected from
impermissibly strong electromagnetic fields.
To this end, assessments and/or measurements must be performed for workplaces.
General conditions
The following general conditions apply for the evaluations and measurements:
1. The laws for protection from electromagnetic fields in force in individual EU member states
can go beyond the minimum requirements of the EMF Directive 2013/35/EU and always take
precedence.
2. The ICNIRP 2010 limits for the workplace are the basis for the assessment.
3. The 26th BImSchV (German Federal Emission Protection Regulation) defines 100 μT (RMS)
for the assessment of active implants.
According to Directive 2013/35/EU, 500 µT (RMS) at 50 Hz is applicable here.
4. The routing of power cables has a significant impact on the electromagnetic fields that occur.
Install and operate the components inside metallic cabinets in compliance with the
documentation and use shielded motor cables.
EMC-compliant setup of the machine or plant (Page 58)
Table A-1 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP13
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*0
*'
*&
1 SIMOTICS 1FP1 and 1FP3 synchronous-reluctance motors have also been - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ -
approved for operation with SINAMICS G120C.
2 The extended safety functions SS1, SLS, SSM and SDI are approved when - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
using synchronous-reluctance motors from Siemens and third-party manu‐
facturers.
3 The converter transmits the state of the fail-safe digital input F-DI 0 via ✓ ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PROFIsafe when using the basic functions.
You can find more information in the "Safety Integrated" Function Manual.
"Safety Integrated" function manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751320)
4 Modbus RTU: - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
The converter supports the combination "1 stop bit" and "no parity".
5 EtherNet/IP: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
When selecting the ODVA AC/DC drive profile, although telegram 1 is pre‐
defined, it can be extended to include additional process data.
The EDS file has been extended accordingly by a telegram with a length of 6
words.
More information is provided in the "Fieldbuses" Function Manual.
"Fieldbus" function manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751350)
EDS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/78026217)
Table A-2 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP10
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
(7SUR)&
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*0
*&
1 New parameter r7844 [1] for displaying the firmware version in plain text. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
"04070901" is equivalent to firmware version V4.7 SP9 HF1, for example
2 Modbus RTU: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
• The factory setting of parameter p2040 was increased to provide more
robust converter operation. Monitoring time for data failure at the Mod‐
bus interface: p2040 = 10 s
• r2057 indicates how the address switch on the converter is set
3 BACnet MS/TP: - - ✓ - - - - - -
• New factory setting for more robust converter operation:
– Baud rate p2020 = 38.4 kBd
– Monitoring time for data failure at the BACnet interface was in‐
creased: p2040 = 10 s
– Factory setting for the maximum number of info frames p2025 [1] = 5
– Factory setting for the maximum number of master addresses p2025
[3] = 32
• r2057 indicates how the address switch on the converter is set
4 Further technological unit kg/cm² for unit switchover ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5 Further technological unit kg/cm² for additional technology controllers - - ✓ - - - - - -
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
6 Commissioning with predefined motor data for SIMOTICS GP/SD synchro‐ ✓ - ✓ - ✓ - ✓ - -
nous-reluctance motors: 1)
Table A-3 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP9
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
(7SUR)&
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*0
*&
1 Support of PM240‑2 FSG Power Modules - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
2 Support of PM240‑2 Power Modules in push-through technology, frame - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
sizes FSD … FSF, for the following voltages:
• 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
• 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
• 3 AC 500 V … 690 V
3 Shortened switch-on time for PM330 Power Modules - - ✓ - - - - - -
4 Expansion of the support for 1FP1 synchronous-reluctance motor with the ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ - -
following converters:
• SINAMICS G110M
• SINAMICS G120D
• SINAMICS G120 with CU240B‑2 or CU240E‑2 Control Unit
A PM240‑2 Power Module is required to operate a 1FP1 synchronous-reluc‐
tance motor with SINAMICS G120
5 Support of 1FP3 synchronous-reluctance motors - - ✓ - - - - - -
A PM240‑2 Power Module is required to operate a 1FP3 synchronous-reluc‐
tance motor along with a selective release from SIEMENS
6 Support of 1LE5 induction motors - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
7 The converter supports forming of the PM330 Power Module DC link capac‐ - - ✓ - - - - - -
itors
8 Setting option for two output reactors using parameter p0235 at the SI‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
NAMICS G120C and SINAMICS G120 with PM240-2 FSD … FSF Power Module
9 Efficiency-optimized operation of induction motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Improved method "Efficiency optimization 2"
10 New setting option for the "Technology application" p0500 = 5 during quick ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
commissioning
11 Expansion of the available PROFIdrive telegrams in the SINAMICS G120C to - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
include telegram 350
12 An SSI encoder can be parameterized as motor encoder - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
13 Expansion of the "Basic positioner" function to include the feedback signal - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
from traversing blocks to the higher-level control system
14 Feedback signal supplemented to indicate that a memory card is not inser‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ted in the converter:
• Parameter r9401 as BiCo parameter for the optional feedback signal to
the higher-level control system.
• New alarm A01101
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
15 Expansion of the "End stop control" function on the following converters: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
• SINAMICS G120
• SINAMICS G120C
• SINAMICS G120D
16 Expansion of the technology controller to include the following functions: - - ✓ - ✓ - - - -
• Gain KP and integral time TN can be adapted.
• The system deviation can be used as adaptation signal
17 Expansion to the torque limiting for SINAMICS G120 converters with ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CU230P‑2 Control Unit
18 The converter displays the state "PROFIenergy pause" as follows: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• LED RDY "green on": 0.5 s
• LED RDY off: 3 s
Table A-4 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP6
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
(7SUR)&
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*0
*&
1 Support for the Power Module PM240-2, FSF frame sizes - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
Support of PM240P‑2 Power Modules frame sizes FSD … FSF - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
Support of safety function Safe Torque Off (STO) via the terminals of the - - - - ✓ ✓ - - -
PM240‑2 Power Module, frame size FSF and PM240P‑2 Power Module
FSD … FSF
2 Support for Power Module PM330 JX frame size - - ✓ - - - - - -
3 Support for 1PC1 induction motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4 The control of synchronous reluctance takes into account the inductance of - - ✓ - - - - - -
the output reactor.
5 Support of motor temperature sensor Pt1000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6 New p4621 parameter for disabling PTC short-circuit monitoring - - - - - - ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Revision of the thermal motor model for protecting the motor against dam‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
age due to overheating in the stator or rotor
8 Changing the quick commissioning in the "Standard Drive Control" applica‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
tion class:
The motor data identification is no longer permanently set to p1900 = 12;
instead, users select the appropriate motor data identification.
Factory setting: p1900 = 2.
9 The free function blocks are also available in the SINAMICS G120C. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Table A-5 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP3
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
(7SUR)&
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*0
*&
1 PM240‑2 Power Modules, frame sizes FSD and FSE are supported - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
The Safety Integrated Basic Function Safe Torque Off (STO) is supported via - - - - ✓ ✓ - - -
the terminals of the PM240‑2 Power Module, frame sizes FSD and FSE
2 Revised PM230 Power Module with new article numbers supported: - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
• IP55 degree of protection: 6SL3223-0DE . . - . . G .
• IP20 degree of protection and Push Through: 6SL321 . -1NE . . - . . G .
The Safety Integrated Basic Function Safe Torque Off (STO) is supported with - - - - ✓ - - - -
the revised PM230 Power Module
3 PM330 Power Module, frame size HX is supported - - ✓ - - - - - -
4 Support of 1FP1 synchronous-reluctance motors - - ✓ - - - - - -
5 Encoderless 1FG1 geared synchronous motors are supported - - - - - - ✓ - -
6 Selection list for 1PH8 induction motors in the STARTER and Startdrive com‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
missioning wizard
7 Updated selection list for 1LE1 induction motors in the STARTER and Start‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
drive commissioning wizard
8 Motor support expanded with 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7 and 1LA9 induction motors ✓ - - - - - - - -
9 Speed and position control obtain their respective actual value from an SSI - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
encoder with incremental tracks. The output signals of the encoder are
available as encoder 2 for position control and timer 1 for speed control.
10 Power Module with temperature-controlled fan ✓ - - - - - - - -
11 SINAMICS "Standard Drive Control" and "Dynamic Drive Control" application - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
classes to simplify commissioning and increase the degree of ruggedness of
the closed-loop motor control.
The SINAMICS application classes are available with the following convert‐
ers:
• SINAMICS G120C
• SINAMICS G120 with PM240, PM240-2 and PM330 Power Modules
12 Moment of inertia estimator with moment of inertia precontrol to optimize ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
the speed controller in operation
13 Friction torque characteristic with automatic plotting to optimize the speed ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
controller
14 Automatic optimization of the technology controller - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
15 The sign of the system deviation for the additional, free technology control‐ - - ✓ - - - - - -
ler can be switched over.
A new parameter defines the sign of the system deviation matching the
particular application, e.g. for cooling or heating applications.
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
16 The technology controller output can be enabled and disabled during oper‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
ation
17 Ramp-function generator remains active with enabled technology controller - - ✓ - - - - - -
18 Line contactor control using a digital output of the converter to save energy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
when the motor is switched off
19 Fast flying restart for PM330 Power Modules: - - ✓ - - - - - -
The "Flying restart" function does not have to wait for the motor demagnet‐
ization time, and identifies the motor speed without requiring a search op‐
eration.
20 Load torque monitoring extended to include the following functions: ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
• Protection against blocking, leakage and dry running operation in pump
applications
• Protection against blocking and broken belts in fan applications
21 Automatic switchover of the real time clock from daylight saving time (sum‐ - - ✓ - - - - - -
mer time) to standard time (winter time).
22 New or revised default settings of the interfaces: p0015 macros 110, 112 - - ✓ - - - - - -
and 120
23 Expansion of the temperature sensors to include DIN-Ni1000 for analog - - ✓ - - - - - -
inputs AI 2 and AI 3
24 Communication via AS-Interface. ✓ - - - - - - - -
Default setting of the communication via AS-i: p0015 macros 30, 31, 32 and
34
25 Communication expansion via Modbus: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
Adjustable parity bit, access to parameters and analog inputs
26 Extending communication via BACnet: - - ✓ - - - - - -
Access to parameters and analog inputs
27 The bus error LED for communication via USS and Modbus can be switched ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
off
28 Default of the minimum speed to 20 % of the rated motor speed - - ✓ - - - - - -
29 For commissioning with an operator panel, the converter automatically ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
backs up the measured data retentively in the ROM after identification of the
motor data.
30 The result of the energy savings calculation for flow machines is available as ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
a connector
31 New "ppm" unit (parts per million) for unit switching ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
32 Displaying speeds during commissioning via operator panel in units of Hz - - ✓ - - - - - -
instead of rpm. Conversion from Hz to rpm via p8552
33 Voltage-dependent current limit for 600V devices of Power Module PM330 - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
and PM240-2
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*0
*&
1 Supporting the identification & maintenance datasets (I&M1 … 4) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2 Fall in pulse rate with increased drive power required by the motor ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• The converter temporarily lowers the pulse frequency if required when the
motor is started up, and simultaneously increases the current limit.
3 S7 communication ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Direct data exchange between the converter and human-machine interface
(HMI).
• Increase in communication performance with the engineering tools and sup‐
port of the S7 routing
4 The basic functions of Safety Integrated are unrestrictedly available in all control - - - - - - ✓ -
types with 1FK7 encoderless permanent-field synchronous motors
5 Encoderless 1FK7 synchronous motors are supported - - - - - - ✓ -
• Direct motor selection based on the article number with associated code
number
• It is not necessary to input individual motor data
6 Pulse input as source of setpoint value - - - - - ✓ - -
• The converter calculates its speed setpoint from a sequence of pulses at the
digital input.
7 Dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP) and temporary device names for PROFI‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NET
8 PROFIenergy Slave profile 2 and 3 ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9 Uniform behavior for component replacement ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• After a component is replaced, a converter with activated Safety Integrated
will report what type of component has been replaced using a unique code.
10 Improved direct-component control in PM230 - - ✓ - - - - -
• Optimized efficiency for pump and fan applications
11 Rounding down of BACnet and macros - - ✓ - - - - -
Table A-7 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.6 SP6
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*&
1 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ - - - - -
• PM330 IP20 GX
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
&8%
&8(
&83
&86
*&
1 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
• PM240-2 IP20 FSB … FSC
• PM240-2 in through-hole technology FSB ... FSC
2 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
• PM230 in through-hole technology FSD ... FSF
3 Motor data preassignment for the 1LA/1LE motors via code number ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• During quick commissioning with the operator panel, set the motor data using a
code number
4 Extension to communication via CANopen ✓ ✓ - - ✓ - -
• CAN velocity, ProfilTorque, SDO channel for each axis, system test with CodeSys,
suppression of ErrorPassiv alarm
5 Extension to communication via BACnet - ✓ - - - - -
• Multistate value objects for alarms, commandable AO objects, objects for config‐
uring the PID controller
6 Communication via EtherNet/IP ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Skip frequency band for analog input ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
• A symmetrical skip frequency band can be set for each analog input around the 0 V
range.
8 Changing the control of the motor holding brake ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
9 Safety function SBC (Safe Brake Control) - - - - ✓ - -
• Secure control of a motor holding brake when using the "Safe Brake Module" option
10 Safety function SS1 (Safe Stop 1) without speed monitoring - - - - ✓ - -
11 Straightforward selection of standard motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Selection of 1LA... and 1LE... motors with an operator panel using a list containing
code numbers
12 Firmware update via memory card ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
13 Safety info channel - - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• BICO source r9734.0…14 for the status bits of the extended safety functions
14 Diagnostic alarms for PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
&8'
&8'
&8%
&8(
&83
*&
1 Support for the new Power Modules: - ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
• PM230 IP20 FSA … FSF
• PM230 in a push-through FSA … FSC
2 Support for the new Power Modules: - ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
• PM240-2 IP20 FSA
• PM240-2 in push-through FSA
3 New Control Units with PROFINET support ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
4 Support of the PROFIenergy profile ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
5 Shared device support via PROFINET ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
6 Write protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Know-how protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8 Adding a second command data set (CDS0 → CDS0 … CDS1) ✓ - - - - -
(All other converters have four command data sets)
9 Position control and basic positioner - - - - - ✓
10 Support of an HTL encoder - - - - ✓ ✓
11 Support of an SSI encoder - - - - - ✓
12 Failsafe digital output - - - - ✓ ✓
A.2.1 Fundamentals
The following functions are implemented in the converter:
• Open-loop and closed-loop control functions
• Communication functions
• Diagnosis and operating functions
Every function comprises one or several blocks that are interconnected with one another.
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
S VHWSRLQWKLJKHU 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUVHWSRLQW
DIWHUWKHUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
352),GULYH
UHFHLYH3='
ELWE\ELW
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 0DLQVHWSRLQW
S VHWSRLQWDIWHUWKH
VHWSRLQWKLJKHU
U UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU S
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
023 U
S VHWSRLQWORZHU
U
Figure A-2 Example: Signal interconnection of two blocks for digital input 0
Binector/connector outputs (CO/BO) are parameters that combine more than one binector
output in a single word (e.g. r0052 CO/BO: status word 1). Each bit in the word represents a
digital (binary) signal. This summary reduces the number of parameters and simplifies
parameter assignment.
Binector or connector outputs (CO, BO or CO/BO) can be used more than once.
Interconnecting signals
How much care is required when you change the signal interconnection?
Note which changes you make. A subsequent analysis of the set signal interconnections is
possible only by evaluating the parameter list.
S>@ 7
', U U S S
3'(
S>@
S S>@
', U
$1' U 212))
The signal of digital input 0 (DI 0) is fed through a time block (PDE 0) and is interconnected with
the input of a logic block (AND 0). The signal of digital input 1 (DI 1) is interconnected to the
second input of the logic block. The logic block output issues the ON/OFF1 command to switch-
on the motor.
Parameter Description
p20161 = 5 The time block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
p20162 = 430 Run sequence of the time block within runtime group 5 (processing before
the AND logic block)
p20032 = 5 The AND logic block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
p20033 = 440 Run sequence of the AND logic block within runtime group 5 (processing
after the time block)
p20159 = 5000.00 Setting the delay time [ms] of the time module: 5 seconds
p20158 = 722.0 Connect the status of DI 0 to the input of the time block
r0722.0 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 0.
p20030[0] = 20160 Interconnecting the time block to the 1st AND input
p20030[1] = 722.1 Interconnecting the status of DI 1 to the 2nd AND input
r0722.1 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 1.
p0840 = 20031 Interconnect the AND output to ON/OFF1
S>@
S>@
S>@
$1' U 212))
Converter Manuals
• CU230P-2 List Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109751313)
Parameter list, alarms and faults. Graphic function diagrams
Additional information
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
EMC-compliant control cabinet design, equipotential bonding and cable routing
Configuring a manual
Further information about the configurability of manuals is available in the Internet:
MyDocumentationManager (https://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/
planning-efficiency/documentation/Pages/default.aspx).
Select "Display and configure" and add the manual to your "mySupport-documentation":
Catalog
Ordering data and technical information for the converters SINAMICS G.
SIZER
The configuration tool for SINAMICS, MICROMASTER and DYNAVERT T drives, motor starters, as
well as SINUMERIK, SIMOTION controllers and SIMATIC technology
SIZER on DVD:
Article number: 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0
Download SIZER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10804987/130000)
Overview
You can find additional information about the product on the Internet:
Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)
This URL provides the following:
• Up-to-date product information (product announcements)
• FAQs
• Downloads
• The Newsletter contains the latest information on the products you use.
• The Knowledge Manager (Intelligent Search) helps you find the documents you need.
• Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the
Forum.
• You can find your local representative for Automation & Drives via our contact database
under "Contact & Partner".
• Information about local service, repair, spare parts and much more can be found under
"Services".
If you have any technical questions, use the online form in the "Support Request" menu:
E G
Generator operation, 370
EMC, 58
Grinding machine, 372, 377
EMERGENCY STOP, 255
EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF, 255
EN 60204‑1, 255
EN 61800-5-2, 254
H
Energy recovery, 38 High Overload, 484
Energy recovery option, 383 Hoist drive, 383
Energy-saving display, 428 Hoisting gear, 379
ESM, 412 Horizontal conveyors, 377, 379
Essential service mode, 412 Hotline, 577
Extending the telegram, 288
I
F I_max controller, 384
Factory assignment, 116 i2t monitoring, 387
Factory settings Inclined conveyors, 379
Restoring the, 201, 202 IND (page index), 279, 283, 284
Fan, 34, 35, 36, 170, 175, 183, 191, 196, 198 Industry Mall, 576
Fans, 385 Installation altitude, 554
U
U/f characteristic, 357
Unit system, 309
Unwinders, 383
Upgrading the firmware, 473
Upload
Data transfer, 220
Download, 219
Use for the intended purpose, 27
User interfaces, 112
UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), 353
V
Vdc_min controller, 409
Vector control, 368
Sensorless, 366
Version
Control Unit, 28
Power Module, 28
Vertical conveyors, 379
Voltage boost, 357, 360, 361, 364
Voltage input, 247
W
Winders, 383
Wire-break monitoring, 249, 388, 389
Write protection, 223
Z
Ziegler Nichols, 341
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Motion Control
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
Germany